TW202001985A - Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film - Google Patents

Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW202001985A
TW202001985A TW108109520A TW108109520A TW202001985A TW 202001985 A TW202001985 A TW 202001985A TW 108109520 A TW108109520 A TW 108109520A TW 108109520 A TW108109520 A TW 108109520A TW 202001985 A TW202001985 A TW 202001985A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
protective film
forming
film
meth
adhesive layer
Prior art date
Application number
TW108109520A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TWI801532B (en
Inventor
佐伯尚哉
古野健太
Original Assignee
日商琳得科股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日商琳得科股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商琳得科股份有限公司
Publication of TW202001985A publication Critical patent/TW202001985A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI801532B publication Critical patent/TWI801532B/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L23/00Details of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • H01L23/28Encapsulations, e.g. encapsulating layers, coatings, e.g. for protection
    • H01L23/31Encapsulations, e.g. encapsulating layers, coatings, e.g. for protection characterised by the arrangement or shape
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L23/00Details of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L23/00Details of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • H01L23/28Encapsulations, e.g. encapsulating layers, coatings, e.g. for protection
    • H01L23/29Encapsulations, e.g. encapsulating layers, coatings, e.g. for protection characterised by the material, e.g. carbon
    • H01L23/293Organic, e.g. plastic
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L24/00Arrangements for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies; Methods or apparatus related thereto
    • H01L24/01Means for bonding being attached to, or being formed on, the surface to be connected, e.g. chip-to-package, die-attach, "first-level" interconnects; Manufacturing methods related thereto
    • H01L24/26Layer connectors, e.g. plate connectors, solder or adhesive layers; Manufacturing methods related thereto
    • H01L24/28Structure, shape, material or disposition of the layer connectors prior to the connecting process
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L24/00Arrangements for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies; Methods or apparatus related thereto
    • H01L24/01Means for bonding being attached to, or being formed on, the surface to be connected, e.g. chip-to-package, die-attach, "first-level" interconnects; Manufacturing methods related thereto
    • H01L24/26Layer connectors, e.g. plate connectors, solder or adhesive layers; Manufacturing methods related thereto
    • H01L24/31Structure, shape, material or disposition of the layer connectors after the connecting process

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Adhesive Tapes (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)
  • Dicing (AREA)

Abstract

A supporting sheet of the present embodiment includes a substrate and an adhesive layer on the substrate, wherein the surface of the adhesive layer side of the substrate is an uneven surface. When 3 mm by 3 mm test pieces are cut from five locations on the supporting sheet and the minimum and maximum thicknesses of each of the five adhesive layers are measured, the average minimum thickness is 1.5 [mu]m or more and the average maximum thickness is 9 [mu]m or less. A composite sheet for forming a protective film of the present embodiment includes the supporting sheet, and also includes a film for forming the protective film on the adhesive layer in the supporting sheet.

Description

支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片Composite sheet for forming support sheet and protective film

本發明是關於一種支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片。 本申請案主張於2018年3月30日提出申請的PCT/JP2018/013636號為基礎的優先權,其內容援用於此。The invention relates to a composite sheet for forming a support sheet and a protective film. This application claims priority based on PCT/JP2018/013636 filed on March 30, 2018, and the contents are used here.

近年來,進行適用所謂倒裝(face down)方式的封裝法的半導體裝置的製造。在倒裝方式中,可使用在電路面上具有凸塊等的電極的半導體晶片,使上述電極與基板接合。因此,有時會將半導體晶片的與電路面相反側的背面露出。In recent years, manufacturing of semiconductor devices to which the so-called face-down packaging method is applied has been carried out. In the flip-chip method, a semiconductor wafer having electrodes such as bumps on the circuit surface may be used to bond the electrodes to the substrate. Therefore, the back surface of the semiconductor wafer opposite to the circuit surface may be exposed.

在此露出的半導體晶片的背面,形成有含有有機材料的樹脂膜作為保護膜,組入半導體裝置中而作為附保護膜的半導體晶片。保護膜為利用來防止在切割步驟、封裝等之後,半導體晶片上發生破裂。On the back surface of the semiconductor wafer exposed here, a resin film containing an organic material is formed as a protective film and incorporated into the semiconductor device as a semiconductor wafer with a protective film. The protective film is used to prevent cracks on the semiconductor wafer after the dicing step, packaging, and the like.

此類保護膜,例如,藉由使具有硬化性的保護膜形成用膜硬化而形成。此外,物性被調節過的非硬化性的保護膜形成用膜有時也直接作為保護膜而被利用。然後,將保護膜形成用膜貼附在半導體晶圓的背面而使用。保護膜形成用膜,例如,會在與半導體晶圓加工時所使用的支撐片成為一體化,以保護膜形成用複合片的狀態,貼附在半導體晶圓的背面;也會在未與支撐片一體化的狀態,貼附在半導體晶圓的背面。Such a protective film is formed, for example, by hardening a protective film forming film having curability. In addition, the non-curing protective film forming film whose physical properties are adjusted may be directly used as a protective film. Then, the protective film forming film is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer and used. The film for forming a protective film, for example, will be integrated with the support sheet used in the processing of a semiconductor wafer, and will be attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer in the state of a composite film for forming a protective film; The integrated state of the wafer is attached to the back of the semiconductor wafer.

保護膜形成用複合片在藉由其中的保護膜形成用膜,貼附在半導體晶片的背面之後,在各別合適的時機,適當進行藉由保護膜形成用膜的硬化而形成保護膜、保護膜形成用膜或保護膜的切斷、對半導體晶圓的半導體晶片的分割(切割)、由支撐片拾取在背面具備有切斷後的保護膜形成用膜或保護膜的半導體晶片(附保護膜形成用膜的半導體晶片或附保護膜的半導體晶片)等。然後,在拾取附保護膜形成用膜的半導體晶片時,藉由保護膜形成用膜的硬化,成為附保護膜的半導體晶片,最終使用附保護膜的半導體晶片,而製造半導體裝置。如此一來,保護膜形成用複合片中的支撐片可作為切割片利用。且,保護膜形成用膜為非硬化性時,在此等的各步驟中,保護膜形成用膜以原狀作為保護膜而操作。After the protective film forming composite sheet is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer with the protective film forming film thereon, the protective film forming layer is appropriately formed and protected at appropriate timings by hardening the protective film forming film. Cutting of the film for film formation or the protective film, singulation (dicing) of the semiconductor wafer of the semiconductor wafer, and picking up the semiconductor wafer provided with the film for protective film formation or the protective film after cutting on the back surface (with protective film) (A semiconductor wafer for forming a film or a semiconductor wafer with a protective film), etc. Then, when picking up a semiconductor wafer with a film for forming a protective film, the semiconductor film with a protective film is formed by curing the film for forming a protective film, and finally a semiconductor wafer with a protective film is used to manufacture a semiconductor device. In this way, the support sheet in the composite sheet for forming a protective film can be used as a dicing sheet. In addition, when the film for forming a protective film is non-curable, in each of these steps, the film for forming a protective film is operated as it is as a protective film.

另一方面,在保護膜形成用膜未與支撐片一體化的狀態,貼附在半導體晶圓的背面之後,在此保護膜形成用膜的與半導體晶圓的貼附面相反側的露出面,貼附支撐片。以後,以與上述使用保護膜形成用複合片時相同的方法,獲得附保護膜的半導體晶片或附保護膜形成用膜的半導體晶片,而製造半導體裝置。此時,雖然保護膜形成用膜在未與支撐片成為一體化的狀態,貼附在半導體晶圓的背面,但藉由在貼附後的與支撐片的一體化,而構成保護膜形成用複合片。On the other hand, after the protective film forming film is not integrated with the support sheet and is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer, the exposed surface of the protective film forming film opposite to the attachment surface of the semiconductor wafer , Attached to the support sheet. Thereafter, a semiconductor wafer with a protective film or a semiconductor wafer with a protective film-forming film is obtained in the same manner as in the case of using the composite film for forming a protective film, and a semiconductor device is manufactured. At this time, although the protective film forming film is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer in a state where it is not integrated with the support sheet, the protective film is formed by integration with the support sheet after attachment Composite sheet.

作為此類保護膜形成用複合片,例如,揭示一種切割膠帶一體型半導體背面保護用膜(保護膜形成用複合片),具備:具有凹凸加工面的基材及在此基材的上述凹凸加工面側上積層有具有黏著劑層的切割膠帶(支撐片),在此切割膠帶的黏著劑層上積層有半導體背面保護用膜(保護膜形成用膜),上述切割膠帶的霧度值為45%以下的切割膠帶一體型半導體背面保護用膜(參照專利文獻1)。As such a composite sheet for forming a protective film, for example, there is disclosed a dicing tape-integrated film for semiconductor back surface protection (a composite sheet for forming a protective film), comprising: a base material having an uneven surface and the above-mentioned uneven processing on the base material A dicing tape (support sheet) having an adhesive layer is laminated on the face side, and a film for protecting the back surface of the semiconductor (film for forming a protective film) is laminated on the adhesive layer of the dicing tape, and the haze value of the dicing tape is 45 % Or less dicing tape integrated semiconductor backside protection film (refer to Patent Document 1).

但是,在專利文獻1揭示的保護膜形成用複合片(切割膠帶一體型半導體背面保護用膜)中,由於在基材的凹凸加工面側上積層有黏著劑層,在黏著劑層、積層在此黏著劑層上的保護膜形成用膜(半導體背面保護用膜)等,顯示上述凹凸的影響。例如,由於黏著劑層的保護膜形成用膜側的面成為凹凸面,在黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜之間,產生未貼合黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜的區域(非貼合區域),使黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜的積層性降低。此外,在保護膜或保護膜形成用膜的黏著劑層側的面,有時藉由雷射照射進行印字,但在黏著劑層的厚度不均勻而黏著劑層厚的部位上,有時隔著基材及黏著劑層的印字的辨識性降低。 [先前技術文獻] [專利文獻]However, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film (a dicing tape-integrated semiconductor back surface protection film) disclosed in Patent Document 1, since the adhesive layer is deposited on the uneven processing surface side of the base material, the adhesive layer The film for protective film formation (film for semiconductor back surface protection) and the like on this adhesive layer show the influence of the above-mentioned irregularities. For example, since the surface of the adhesive layer on the side of the protective film forming film becomes a concave-convex surface, an area where the adhesive layer and the protective film forming film are not bonded between the adhesive layer and the protective film forming film (non-sticking) Area) to reduce the stackability of the adhesive layer and the protective film forming film. In addition, on the surface of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer side, printing may be performed by laser irradiation, but the thickness of the adhesive layer is not uniform and the adhesive layer is thick, sometimes separated The visibility of the printing on the substrate and adhesive layer is reduced. [Prior Technical Literature] [Patent Literature]

專利文獻1:日本特許第5432853號公報Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 5432853

[發明欲解決的問題][Problems to be solved by the invention]

本發明的目的是提供一種支撐片以及包括上述支撐片的保護膜形成用複合片,支撐片為在基材的凹凸面側包括黏著劑層所構成,在於其黏著劑層上包括保護膜形成用膜的保護膜形成用複合片中,可實現黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜間的良好積層性,隔著保護膜或保護膜形成用膜的支撐片的良好印字辨識性。 [解決問題的手段]An object of the present invention is to provide a support sheet and a composite sheet for forming a protective film including the above support sheet. The support sheet is formed by including an adhesive layer on the concave-convex surface side of the base material, wherein the adhesive layer includes a protective film forming layer In the composite sheet for forming a protective film of a film, good stackability between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film can be achieved, and good legibility of the support sheet through the protective film or the film for forming a protective film can be achieved. [Means for solving the problem]

本發明提供一種支撐片,其為包括基材、在上述基材上包括黏著劑層的支撐片,上述基材的上述黏著劑層側的面為凹凸面,從上述支撐片的5處切出試片,在此5片的試片中,求得各別黏著劑層的厚度的最小值及最大值時,上述最小值的平均值為1.5μm以上,上述最大值的平均值為9μm以下。The invention provides a support sheet comprising a base material and an adhesive layer on the base material. The surface of the base material on the side of the adhesive layer is a concave-convex surface and is cut out from 5 places of the support sheet For the test piece, among the five test pieces, when the minimum and maximum thicknesses of the respective adhesive layers were obtained, the average value of the minimum value was 1.5 μm or more, and the average value of the maximum value was 9 μm or less.

在本發明的支撐片中,上述黏著劑層亦可直接接觸上述基材的凹凸面。 此外,本發明提供一種保護膜形成用複合片,為在上述支撐片中的黏著劑層上,包括保護膜形成用膜。 [發明的效果]In the support sheet of the present invention, the adhesive layer may directly contact the uneven surface of the base material. In addition, the present invention provides a composite sheet for forming a protective film, which includes a film for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer in the support sheet. [Effect of invention]

藉由使用本發明的支撐片而構成保護膜形成用複合片,可實現黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜間的良好積層性,隔著保護膜或保護膜形成用膜的支撐片的良好印字辨識性。By using the supporting sheet of the present invention to form a composite sheet for forming a protective film, good stackability between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film can be achieved, and good printing of the supporting sheet through the protective film or the film for forming a protective film can be achieved Recognition.

◇支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片 本發明一實施形態相關的支撐片為包括基材、在上述基材上包括黏著劑層的支撐片,上述基材的上述黏著劑層側的面為凹凸面,從上述支撐片的5處切出測試片,在此5片的試驗片中,求得各別黏著劑層的厚度的最小值及最大值時,上述最小值的平均值(在本說明書中,有時稱為「S值」)為1.5μm以上,上述最大值的平均值(在本說明書中,有時稱為「L值」)為9μm以下。 此外,本發明一實施形態相關的保護膜形成用複合片為在上述支撐片中的黏著劑層上,包括保護膜形成用膜。◇Composite sheet for forming support sheet and protective film A support sheet according to an embodiment of the present invention is a support sheet including a base material and an adhesive layer on the base material. The surface of the base material on the adhesive layer side is a concave-convex surface, cut from 5 places on the support sheet Test piece, out of the five test pieces, the minimum and maximum values of the thickness of each adhesive layer, the average value of the above minimum (in this specification, sometimes referred to as "S value" ) Is 1.5 μm or more, and the average value of the maximum value (sometimes referred to as “L value” in this specification) is 9 μm or less. In addition, the composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention includes the film for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer in the support sheet.

上述支撐片在基材的凹凸面側包括黏著劑層,在包括此支撐片所構成的保護膜形成用複合片中,此凹凸面的影響受到抑制。 更具體而言,藉由上述黏著劑層的S值為1.5μm以上,黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜間的積層性變得良好。在本說明書中,「積層性」,若無特別說明,是指作為對象的2層的積層狀態的正常性。「積層性良好」,例如,是指作為對象的相鄰2層之間,完全沒有非貼合區域(空隙部分),或是非貼合區域的數量較少且非貼合區域的層間距離小。 另一方面,藉由上述黏著劑層的L值為9μm以下,隔著保護膜或保護膜形成用膜的支撐片的印字辨識性變得良好The support sheet includes an adhesive layer on the uneven surface side of the base material. In the composite sheet for forming a protective film including the support sheet, the influence of the uneven surface is suppressed. More specifically, when the S value of the adhesive layer is 1.5 μm or more, the stackability between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film becomes good. In this specification, "lamination", unless otherwise specified, refers to the normality of the lamination state of the target two layers. "Good lamination" means, for example, that there are no non-bonding regions (voids) between the two adjacent layers, or the number of non-bonding regions is small and the distance between the non-bonding regions is small. On the other hand, when the L value of the adhesive layer is 9 μm or less, the legibility of the support sheet through the protective film or the protective film forming film becomes good

上述試片從支撐片的5處切出,將支撐片在其厚度方向的全區域切斷而獲得者。試片為包括構成支撐片的全部層的小片。The above-mentioned test piece was cut out from 5 places of the support sheet, and the support sheet was cut in the entire area in the thickness direction to obtain the test sheet. The test piece is a small piece including all layers constituting the support sheet.

試片的大小並無特別限定,但構成試片的各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層面或露出面的一邊的長度,以2mm以上為佳。藉由使用此類大小的試片,可更高精度地求得黏著劑層的S值及L值。 上述一邊的長度的最大值並無特別限定。例如,從易於製作試片的觀點而言,上述一邊的長度,以10mm以下為佳。The size of the test piece is not particularly limited, but the length of the accumulation surface or the side of the exposed surface of each layer (base material, adhesive layer, etc.) constituting the test piece is preferably 2 mm or more. By using test pieces of this size, the S value and L value of the adhesive layer can be obtained with higher accuracy. The maximum value of the length of the above side is not particularly limited. For example, from the viewpoint of ease of making a test piece, the length of the above side is preferably 10 mm or less.

試片的平面形狀,亦即,構成試片的各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層面或露出面的形狀,以多邊形為佳,從易於切出試片的觀點而言,以四邊形為更佳。The planar shape of the test piece, that is, the shape of the accumulated surface or exposed surface of each layer (base material, adhesive layer, etc.) constituting the test piece is preferably a polygon, and from the viewpoint of ease of cutting out the test piece, a quadrilateral For better.

作為較佳的試片,可列舉,例如,構成試片的各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層面或露出面,其大小為3mm × 3mm的四邊形者。但是,此等僅為較佳的試片的一例。Examples of preferred test pieces include, for example, those having a laminate surface or exposed surface of each layer (base material, adhesive layer, etc.) constituting the test piece, and having a size of 3 mm×3 mm. However, these are only examples of better test pieces.

在支撐片中試片的5處的切出位置並無特別限定,但為了可更高精度地求得黏著劑層的S值及L值,可考慮選擇下述保護膜形成用膜的積層預定位置。 可列舉,例如,在支撐片中的1片保護膜形成用膜的積層預定位置當中,列舉5處,其中保護膜形成用膜的中心(重心)部為預定配置的1處,以及在保護膜形成用膜的靠近邊緣部的部位,且相對於此中心(重心)部幾乎點對稱的位置為預定配置的4處。The cutting position of the test piece in the support sheet at 5 places is not particularly limited, but in order to obtain the S value and L value of the adhesive layer with higher accuracy, it may be considered to select the following deposition plan of the protective film forming film position. For example, among the predetermined positions for lamination of one protective film forming film in the support sheet, 5 are listed, in which the center (center of gravity) of the protective film forming film is one of the predetermined positions, and the protective film The portion of the film for formation that is close to the edge portion and almost point-symmetrical with respect to the center (center of gravity) portion is the predetermined four positions.

在支撐片中,試片的切出位置的中心(重心)間距離,以50~200mm為佳。如此一來,可更高精度的求得黏著劑層的S值及L值。In the support sheet, the distance between the center (center of gravity) of the cut-out position of the test piece is preferably 50 to 200 mm. In this way, the S value and the L value of the adhesive layer can be obtained with higher accuracy.

為了從試片求得黏著劑層的S值及L值,在試片重新形成剖面,在此形成的剖面,對每一試片,測定黏著劑層的厚度的最小值及最大值。 新形成的剖面,每1片試片,可為僅1面,亦可為2面以上,但通常僅1面已十分足夠。 然後,從此等至少5個最小值及最大值,計算出S值及L值即可。In order to obtain the S value and the L value of the adhesive layer from the test piece, a cross section is newly formed on the test piece, and the cross section formed here is measured for each test piece for the minimum and maximum thickness of the adhesive layer. The newly formed cross-section may have only one side or more than two sides per test piece, but usually only one side is sufficient. Then, from these at least 5 minimum and maximum values, the S value and the L value may be calculated.

在試片中,可藉由習知方法形成剖面。例如,藉由使用習知剖面樣品製作裝置(Cross section polisher),可抑制偏差以高再現性,在試片上形成剖面。In the test piece, the profile can be formed by a conventional method. For example, by using a conventional cross-section sampler (Cross section polisher), deviation can be suppressed and a cross-section can be formed on the test piece with high reproducibility.

黏著劑層的厚度的最小值及最大值,例如,可使用掃描電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察試片的上述剖面而測定。The minimum value and maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer can be measured by observing the above-mentioned cross section of the test piece using a scanning electron microscope (SEM), for example.

在各試片的上述剖面,測定黏著劑層的厚度的最小值及最大值的區域,以在相對於構成試片的各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層方向呈直角的方向(大致是相對於各層的積層面或露出面呈平行的方向)的50~1500μm的區域為佳。如此一來,可高效率且高精度地測定黏著劑層的厚度的最小值及最大值。In the above-mentioned cross section of each test piece, the minimum and maximum thickness regions of the adhesive layer are measured so as to be at a right angle (approximately) to the stacking direction of each layer (base material, adhesive layer, etc.) constituting the test piece. It is preferably a region of 50 to 1500 μm with respect to the accumulation surface or exposed surface of each layer). In this way, the minimum and maximum thickness of the adhesive layer can be measured with high efficiency and high accuracy.

在未構成保護膜形成用複合片階段的支撐片與構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片之間,比較黏著劑層的厚度的最小值時,此等最小值彼此相同,或是構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片的上述最小值為稍小的程度,這種較小的情況,為兩者的差可被忽視的程度。 關於黏著劑層的厚度的最大值亦相同。亦即,在未構成保護膜形成用複合片階段的支撐片與構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片之間,比較黏著劑層的厚度的最大值時,此等最大值彼此相同,或是構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片的上述最大值為稍小的程度,這種較小的情況,為兩者的差可被忽視的程度。 因此,使用從保護膜形成用複合片所切出的試片而不是支撐片,亦可使用從支撐片所切出的試片時相同方法,求得黏著劑層的S值及L值。如此使用從保護膜形成用複合片所切出的試片時,黏著劑層的S值為1.5μm以上、黏著劑層的L值為9μm以下時,此保護膜形成用複合片成為反映上述本發明效果者。When the minimum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer is compared between the support sheet that does not constitute the composite sheet for forming a protective film and the support sheet constituting the composite sheet for forming a protective film, these minimum values are the same as each other, or constitute a protective film The above-mentioned minimum value of the support sheet of the composite sheet for forming is a slightly small degree, and in this small case, the difference between the two is negligible. The maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer is also the same. That is, when the maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer is compared between the support sheet that does not constitute the composite sheet for forming a protective film and the support sheet constituting the composite sheet for forming a protective film, these maximum values are the same as each other, or The above-mentioned maximum value of the support sheet constituting the composite sheet for forming a protective film is slightly smaller. In such a small case, the difference between the two is negligible. Therefore, the test piece cut out from the composite film for protective film formation may be used instead of the support piece, and the same method as when the test piece cut out from the support piece may be used to obtain the S value and the L value of the adhesive layer. When the test piece cut out from the composite film for protective film formation is used in this manner, when the S value of the adhesive layer is 1.5 μm or more and the L value of the adhesive layer is 9 μm or less, the composite film for protective film formation reflects the above Invent the effect.

亦即,本發明一實施形態相關的保護膜形成用複合片,為在上述支撐片中的黏著劑層上包括保護膜形成用膜的保護膜形成用複合片,從上述保護膜形成用複合片的5處切出試片,在此5片的試驗片中,求得各別黏著劑層的厚度的最小值及最大值時,上述最小值的平均值(S值)為1.5μm以上,上述最大值的平均值(L值)為9μm以下。That is, the composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention is a composite sheet for forming a protective film including a film for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer in the support sheet, and from the composite sheet for forming the protective film Test pieces were cut out at 5 places, and the minimum and maximum values of the thickness of each adhesive layer were obtained from these 5 test pieces, and the average value (S value) of the minimum value was 1.5 μm or more. The average value (L value) of the maximum value is 9 μm or less.

另外,從保護膜形成用複合片所切出的試片為將保護膜形成用複合片在其厚度方向的全區域切斷而得者,為包括構成保護膜形成用複合片的全部層的小片。The test piece cut out from the protective film forming composite sheet is obtained by cutting the entire protective film forming composite sheet in its thickness direction, and is a small piece including all layers constituting the protective film forming composite sheet .

以下,一邊參照圖式,一邊說明關於本發明的保護膜形成用複合片的全體構成。另外,以下說明所使用的圖式,為了易於瞭解本發明的特徵,基於方便,有時會放大顯示主要的部分,各構成元件的尺寸比率等未必與實際相同。Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the composite sheet for forming a protective film of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, the drawings used in the following description are for easy understanding of the characteristics of the present invention. For convenience, the main part may be enlarged and the size ratio of each component may not be the same as the actual one.

圖1是示意性地顯示本發明一實施形態相關的支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的剖面圖。 此處所示的保護膜形成用複合片1A包括基材11,在基材11上包括黏著劑層12,在黏著劑層12上包括保護膜形成用膜13。支撐片10為基材11及黏著劑層12的積層體,換言之,保護膜形成用複合片1A包括在支撐片10一側的面(在本說明書中,有時稱為「第一面」)10a上積層保護膜形成用膜13的構成。此外,保護膜形成用複合片1A進一步在保護膜形成用膜13上包括剝離膜15。1 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a composite sheet for forming a support sheet and a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention. The composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film shown here includes a base material 11, an adhesive layer 12 on the base material 11, and a film 13 for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer 12. The support sheet 10 is a laminate of the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12, in other words, the protective film forming composite sheet 1A includes a surface on the support sheet 10 side (in this specification, it is sometimes referred to as a "first surface") 10a. The structure of the film 13 for forming a protective film is laminated on top. Moreover, the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation further includes the peeling film 15 on the film 13 for protective film formation.

在保護膜形成用複合片1A中,在基材11的一面(在本說明書中,有時稱為「第一面」)11a積層黏著劑層12,在黏著劑層12的與基材11側相反側的面(在本說明書中,有時稱為「第一面」)12a的全面積層保護膜形成用膜13,在保護膜形成用膜13的與黏著劑層12側相反側的面(在本說明書中,有時稱為「第一面」)13a的一部分,亦即,在周緣部附近的區域積層治具用接著劑層16,在保護膜形成用膜13的第一面13a當中未積層有治具用接著劑層16的面以及治具用接著劑層16的未接觸保護膜形成用膜13的面16a(上面及側面),積層剝離膜15。 另外,圖1中,符號13b表示保護膜形成用膜13的黏著劑層12側的面(在本說明書中,有時稱為「第二面」)。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, an adhesive layer 12 is laminated on one side of the base material 11 (sometimes referred to as a "first surface" in this specification) 11a, and the adhesive layer 12 is on the side of the base material 11 The opposite side surface (in this specification, it is sometimes referred to as the "first surface") 12a of the full-area layer protective film forming film 12a, the surface on the side opposite to the adhesive layer 12 side of the protective film forming film 13 ( In this specification, it is sometimes referred to as the "first surface") part of 13a, that is, the adhesive layer 16 for the jig is deposited in the area near the peripheral edge portion, in the first surface 13a of the protective film forming film 13 The surface of the adhesive layer 16 for the jig and the surface 16a (upper surface and side surface) of the adhesive layer 16 for the jig not contacting the protective film forming film 13 are not laminated, and the peeling film 15 is laminated. In addition, in FIG. 1, the symbol 13b indicates a surface on the adhesive layer 12 side of the protective film forming film 13 (in this specification, it is sometimes referred to as a "second surface").

治具用接著劑層16,例如,可為含有接著劑成分的單層構造,亦可為在成為芯材的片材的兩面積層含有接著劑成分的層的複數層構造。The adhesive agent layer 16 for a jig may have, for example, a single-layer structure containing an adhesive agent component, or may be a multiple-layer structure of a layer containing an adhesive agent component on both areas of a core material sheet.

在保護膜形成用複合片1A中,基材11的第一面11a為凹凸面。 此外,黏著劑層12以直接接觸在基材11的第一面(凹凸面)11a而設置。因此,黏著劑層12的基材11側的面(在本說明書中,有時稱為「第二面」)12b為凹凸面。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, the first surface 11a of the base material 11 is an uneven surface. In addition, the adhesive layer 12 is provided to directly contact the first surface (concavo-convex surface) 11a of the base material 11. Therefore, the surface of the adhesive layer 12 on the side of the base material 11 (in this specification, it is sometimes referred to as a "second surface") 12b is an uneven surface.

在保護膜形成用複合片1A中,基材11的與黏著劑層12側相反側的面(在本說明書中,有時稱為「第二面」)11b可為凹凸面及平滑面(非凹凸面、光滑面)的任一者,但以平滑面為佳。基材11的第二面11b亦可稱為支撐片10的與保護膜形成用膜13側相反側的面(在本說明書中,有時稱為「第二面」)10b。 關於「凹凸面」、「平滑面」如後詳述。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, the surface of the base material 11 on the side opposite to the adhesive layer 12 side (in this specification, it is sometimes referred to as "second surface") 11b may be an uneven surface and a smooth surface (not (Rough surface, smooth surface), but smooth surface is preferred. The second surface 11b of the base material 11 may also be referred to as the surface of the support sheet 10 on the side opposite to the protective film forming film 13 side (in this specification, it is sometimes referred to as a "second surface") 10b. The "concave surface" and "smooth surface" will be described in detail later.

圖1所示的保護膜形成用複合片1A,在剝離膜15被去除的狀態,在保護膜形成用膜13的第一面13a貼附半導體晶圓(圖示省略)的背面,再者,將治具用接著劑層16的面16a當中的上面,貼附在環框架等的治具而使用。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the release film 15 is removed, the back surface of a semiconductor wafer (not shown) is attached to the first surface 13 a of the film 13 for forming a protective film. The upper surface of the surface 16a of the adhesive layer 16 for jigs is attached to a jig such as a ring frame and used.

圖2為示意性地顯示本發明其他實施形態相關的保護膜形成用複合片連同支撐片的剖面圖。 另外,在圖2以後的圖中,與已說明的圖所示者相同的構成元件,標示與已說明的圖相同的符號,並省略其詳細說明。2 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a supporting sheet according to another embodiment of the present invention. In the subsequent figures of FIG. 2, the same constituent elements as those shown in the already described figures are denoted by the same symbols as in the already explained figures, and their detailed descriptions are omitted.

此處所示的保護膜形成用複合片1B,除了未具備治具用接著劑層16的差異點以外,其餘與圖1所示保護膜形成用複合片1A相同。亦即,在保護膜形成用複合片1B中,在基材11的第一面11a積層黏著劑層12,在黏著劑層12的第一面12a的全面積層保護膜形成用膜13,在保護膜形成用膜13的第一面13a的全面積層剝離膜15。The composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film shown here is the same as the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 1 except that the adhesive layer 16 for a jig is not provided. That is, in the protective film forming composite sheet 1B, the adhesive layer 12 is laminated on the first surface 11 a of the base material 11, and the entire area of the protective film forming film 13 is deposited on the first surface 12 a of the adhesive layer 12 to protect The full-area layer release film 15 on the first surface 13a of the film 13 for film formation.

在保護膜形成用複合片1B中,基材11的第一面11a亦為凹凸面。 此外,黏著劑層12以直接接觸在基材11的第一面(凹凸面)11a而設置。因此,黏著劑層12的基材11側的面(第二面)12b為凹凸面。 在保護膜形成用複合片1B中,基材11的第二面11b(換言之,支撐片10的第二面10b)可為凹凸面及平滑面(非凹凸面)的任一者,但以平滑面為佳。In the composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film, the first surface 11a of the base material 11 is also an uneven surface. In addition, the adhesive layer 12 is provided to directly contact the first surface (concavo-convex surface) 11a of the base material 11. Therefore, the surface (second surface) 12b on the base material 11 side of the adhesive layer 12 is an uneven surface. In the composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film, the second surface 11b of the base material 11 (in other words, the second surface 10b of the support sheet 10) may be any one of an uneven surface and a smooth surface (non-concavo-convex surface). Face is better.

圖2所示的保護膜形成用複合片1B,在剝離膜15被去除的狀態,保護膜形成用膜13的第一面13a當中,在中央側的一部份的區域貼附半導體晶圓(圖示省略)的背面,再者,周緣部附近的區域貼附在環框架等的治具而使用。In the composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 2, in a state where the peeling film 15 is removed, a semiconductor wafer is attached to a part of the center side of the first surface 13 a of the film for forming a protective film 13 ( The back surface of (omitted in the figure), and the area near the peripheral portion is attached to a jig such as a ring frame and used.

圖3是示意性地顯示本發明進一步其他實施形態相關的保護膜形成用複合片連同支撐片的剖面圖。 此處所示的保護膜形成用複合片1C,除了保護膜形成用膜的形狀為不同這一點以外,其餘與圖2所示保護膜形成用複合片1B相同。亦即,保護膜形成用複合片1C包括基材11,在基材11上包括黏著劑層12,在黏著劑層12上包括保護膜形成用膜23。支撐片10為基材11及黏著劑層12的積層體,換言之,保護膜形成用複合片1C包括在支撐片10的第一面(保護膜形成用膜23側之面)10a上積層有保護膜形成用膜23的構成。此外,保護膜形成用複合片1C進一步在保護膜形成用膜23上包括剝離膜15。3 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a supporting sheet according to still another embodiment of the present invention. The composite sheet 1C for protective film formation shown here is the same as the composite sheet 1B for protective film formation shown in FIG. 2 except that the shape of the film for protective film formation is different. That is, the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film includes the base material 11, the adhesive layer 12 on the base material 11, and the protective film forming film 23 on the adhesive layer 12. The support sheet 10 is a laminate of the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12. In other words, the protective film forming composite sheet 1C includes the first surface of the support sheet 10 (the surface on the side of the protective film formation film 23) 10 a with protection. The structure of the film 23 for film formation. In addition, the composite sheet for protective film formation 1C further includes a release film 15 on the protective film forming film 23.

在保護膜形成用複合片1C中,在基材11的第一面11a積層黏著劑層12,在黏著劑層12的第一面12a的一部分,亦即,在中央側的區域積層保護膜形成用膜23。然後,黏著劑層12的第一面12a當中,在未積層有保護膜形成用膜23的區域以及保護膜形成用膜23的未接觸黏著劑層12的面23a(上面及側面)上,積層剝離膜15。 另外,圖3中,符號23b表示保護膜形成用膜23的黏著劑層12側的面(在本說明書中,有時稱為「第二面」)。In the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film, the adhesive layer 12 is deposited on the first surface 11 a of the base material 11, and a part of the first surface 12 a of the adhesive layer 12 is formed, that is, a protective film is formed on the central side region.用膜23。 With membrane 23. Then, on the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12, the area 23 where the protective film forming film 23 is not laminated and the surface 23a (upper and side surfaces) of the protective film forming film 23 not contacting the adhesive layer 12 are laminated Peeling film 15. In addition, in FIG. 3, the symbol 23b represents the surface of the protective film forming film 23 on the side of the adhesive layer 12 (in this specification, it is sometimes referred to as a "second surface").

保護膜形成用複合片1C當從上方往下看的平面視時,保護膜形成用膜23的表面積比黏著劑層12的表面積更小,例如,具有圓形等的形狀。The protective film forming composite sheet 1C has a surface area smaller than the surface area of the adhesive layer 12 when viewed from above in a plan view, and has a shape such as a circle.

在保護膜形成用複合片1C中,基材11的第一面11a為凹凸面。 此外,黏著劑層12以直接接觸在基材11的第一面(凹凸面)11a而設置。因此,黏著劑層12的基材11側的面(第二面)12b為凹凸面。 在保護膜形成用複合片1C中,基材11的第二面11b(換言之,支撐片10的第二面10b)亦可為凹凸面及平滑面(非凹凸面)的任一者,但以平滑面為佳。In the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film, the first surface 11a of the base material 11 is an uneven surface. In addition, the adhesive layer 12 is provided to directly contact the first surface (concavo-convex surface) 11a of the base material 11. Therefore, the surface (second surface) 12b on the base material 11 side of the adhesive layer 12 is an uneven surface. In the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film, the second surface 11b of the base material 11 (in other words, the second surface 10b of the support sheet 10) may be any one of an uneven surface and a smooth surface (non-concavo-convex surface). Smooth surface is better.

圖3所示保護膜形成用複合片1C,在剝離膜15被去除的狀態,在保護膜形成用膜23的面23a貼附半導體晶圓(圖示省略)的背面,再者,黏著劑層12的第一面12a當中,將未積層有保護膜形成用膜23的區域貼附在環框架等的治具而使用。In the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 3, in a state where the peeling film 15 is removed, the back surface of a semiconductor wafer (not shown) is attached to the surface 23a of the film 23 for forming a protective film. Furthermore, the adhesive layer Of the first surface 12a of 12, the area where the protective film forming film 23 is not laminated is used by attaching it to a jig such as a ring frame.

另外,在圖3所示保護膜形成用複合片1C中,黏著劑層12的第一面12a當中,亦可在未積層有保護膜形成用膜23的區域,積層與圖1所示相同的治具用接著劑層(圖示省略)。包括此種治具用接著劑層的保護膜形成用複合片1C,與圖1所示的保護膜形成用複合片相同,將治具用接著劑層的上面貼附在環框架等的治具而使用。In addition, in the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 3, the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12 may also be deposited in the area where the protective film forming film 23 is not laminated. Adhesive layer for jig (not shown). The composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film including such an adhesive layer for a jig is the same as the composite sheet for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 1, and the upper surface of the adhesive layer for a jig is attached to a jig such as a ring frame And use.

如上述,保護膜形成用複合片,不論支撐片及保護膜形成用膜為何種形態,皆可包括治具用接著劑層。但是,通常,如圖1所示,作為包括治具用接著劑層的保護膜形成用複合片,以在保護膜形成用膜上包括治具用接著劑層者為佳。As described above, the composite sheet for forming a protective film may include an adhesive layer for jigs regardless of the form of the support sheet and the film for forming a protective film. However, in general, as shown in FIG. 1, as the composite film for forming a protective film including an adhesive layer for a jig, it is preferable to include an adhesive layer for a jig on the film for forming a protective film.

本發明一實施形態相關的保護膜形成用複合片不限於圖1~圖3所示者,在無損本發明效果的範圍內,圖1~圖3所示者的一部分的構成可加以變更或刪除,亦可追加至目前為止所說明的進一步其他的構成。The composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention is not limited to those shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, and a part of the configurations shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 may be changed or deleted within the range that does not impair the effects of the present invention. It may be added to the other structures described so far.

例如,在如圖1~圖3所示的保護膜形成用複合片中,亦可在基材11與黏著劑層12之間設置中間層。亦即,在本發明的保護膜形成用複合片中,支撐片亦可為以基材、中間層及黏著劑層的順序,在其厚度方向上予以積層而構成。作為中間層,可對應目的而選擇任意的中間層。 此外,如圖1~圖3所示的保護膜形成用複合片,亦可在任意處設置上述中間層以外的層。 此外,在保護膜形成用複合片中,在剝離膜以及與此剝離膜直接接觸的層之間,有一部分可產生間隙。 此外,在保護膜形成用複合片中,各層的大小、形狀等可對應目的而任意調節。For example, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, an intermediate layer may be provided between the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12. That is, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film of the present invention, the support sheet may be formed by stacking the substrate, the intermediate layer, and the adhesive layer in the thickness direction. As the intermediate layer, an arbitrary intermediate layer can be selected according to the purpose. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the composite sheet for forming a protective film may be provided with a layer other than the intermediate layer at any place. In addition, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film, a gap may be formed between the release film and the layer directly in contact with the release film. In addition, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film, the size, shape, etc. of each layer can be arbitrarily adjusted according to the purpose.

但是,如圖1~圖3所示,在保護膜形成用複合片中,以黏著劑層直接接觸基材的凹凸面(第一面)為佳;換言之,以基材與黏著劑層之間未具備中間層而在基材上直接接觸黏著劑層而積層為佳。 此外,在保護膜形成用複合片中,以保護膜形成用膜直接接觸黏著劑層的第一面為佳;換言之,以黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜之間未具備其他層而黏著劑層上直接接觸保護膜形成用膜而積層為佳。 然後,在保護膜形成用複合片中,以同時滿除上述條件者為更佳,亦即,以基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用膜依此順序,在其厚度方向,彼此直接接觸而積層的構成者為更佳。However, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film, it is better to directly contact the uneven surface (first surface) of the substrate with the adhesive layer; in other words, between the substrate and the adhesive layer Without an intermediate layer, it is preferable to directly contact the adhesive layer on the base material and laminate. In addition, in the composite film for forming a protective film, it is preferable that the film for forming the protective film directly contacts the first surface of the adhesive layer; in other words, the adhesive is not provided with another layer between the adhesive layer and the film for forming the protective film. It is preferable that the layer is in direct contact with the film for forming a protective film, and the layer is stacked. Then, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film, it is better to satisfy the above conditions at the same time, that is, to directly contact each other in the thickness direction of the substrate, the adhesive layer, and the film for forming a protective film in this order. The buildup of the layer is better.

上述支撐片以透明為佳。 支撐片亦可對應目的而加以著色,亦可蒸鍍有其他層。 例如,保護膜形成用膜為能量線硬化性時,支撐片以能量線能夠穿透者為佳。The support sheet is preferably transparent. The support sheet can also be colored according to the purpose, and other layers can also be evaporated. For example, when the film for forming a protective film is energy ray curable, the support sheet is preferably one that can penetrate energy ray.

在本說明書中,「能量線」,是指電磁波或帶電粒子射線中具有能量量子者,作為其例,可列舉紫外線、放射線、電子束等。紫外線可例如使用作為紫外線來源的高壓水銀燈、融熔燈(fusion lamp)、氙氣燈、不可見光(black light)或LED燈等照射。電子束可照射藉由電子束加速器等而產生者。 在本說明書中,「能量線硬化性」,是指藉由照射能量線而硬化的性質,「非能量線硬化性」,是指即使照射能量線但不硬化的性質。In this specification, "energy rays" refer to those having energy quanta in electromagnetic waves or charged particle beams, and examples thereof include ultraviolet rays, radiation, and electron beams. Ultraviolet rays can be irradiated using, for example, a high-pressure mercury lamp, fusion lamp, xenon lamp, black light, or LED lamp as a source of ultraviolet rays. The electron beam can be irradiated by an electron beam accelerator or the like. In this specification, "energy ray hardenability" refers to the property of being hardened by irradiating energy rays, and "non-energy ray hardening property" refers to the property of not being hardened even when irradiated with energy rays.

在支撐片中,波長375nm的光的穿透率,以30%以上為佳,以50%以上為更佳,以70%以上為特佳。藉由上述光的穿透率為此等範圍,隔著支撐片在保護膜形成用膜照射能量線(紫外線)時,更提升保護膜形成用膜的硬化度。 在支撐片中,波長375nm的光的穿透率的上限值並無特別限定。例如,上述光的穿透率可為95%以下。In the support sheet, the transmittance of light with a wavelength of 375 nm is preferably 30% or more, more preferably 50% or more, and particularly preferably 70% or more. With the above-mentioned light transmittance in these ranges, when the protective film forming film is irradiated with energy rays (ultraviolet rays) through the support sheet, the degree of curing of the protective film forming film is further improved. In the support sheet, the upper limit of the transmittance of light with a wavelength of 375 nm is not particularly limited. For example, the above-mentioned light transmittance may be 95% or less.

在支撐片中,波長532nm的光的穿透率,以30%以上為佳,以50%以上為更佳,以70%以上為特佳。藉由上述光的穿透率為此等範圍,隔著支撐片在保護膜形成用膜或保護膜照射雷射光,於其上印字時,可更清楚地印字。 在支撐片中,波長532nm的光的穿透率的上限值並無特別限定。例如,上述光的穿透率可為95%以下。In the support sheet, the transmittance of light with a wavelength of 532 nm is preferably 30% or more, more preferably 50% or more, and particularly preferably 70% or more. With the above-mentioned light transmittance in these ranges, the protective film forming film or the protective film is irradiated with laser light through the support sheet, and when printing on it, the characters can be printed more clearly. In the support sheet, the upper limit of the transmittance of light with a wavelength of 532 nm is not particularly limited. For example, the above-mentioned light transmittance may be 95% or less.

在支撐片中,波長1064nm的光的穿透率,以30%以上為佳,以50%以上為更佳,以70%以上為特佳。藉由上述光的穿透率為此等範圍,隔著支撐片在保護膜形成用膜或保護膜照射雷射光,於其上印字時,可更清楚地印字。 在支撐片中,波長1064nm的光的穿透率的上限值並無特別限定。例如,上述光的穿透率可為95%以下。In the support sheet, the transmittance of light with a wavelength of 1064 nm is preferably 30% or more, more preferably 50% or more, and particularly preferably 70% or more. With the above-mentioned light transmittance in these ranges, the protective film forming film or the protective film is irradiated with laser light through the support sheet, and when printing on it, the characters can be printed more clearly. In the support sheet, the upper limit of the transmittance of light with a wavelength of 1064 nm is not particularly limited. For example, the above-mentioned light transmittance may be 95% or less.

支撐片的穿透清晰度,以30以上為佳,以100以上為更佳,以200以上為特佳。藉由上述穿透清晰度為此等範圍,隔著支撐片,更易於確認保護膜形成用膜的浮起剝離、印字的不合宜及缺陷等。 支撐片的穿透清晰度並無特別限定。例如,上述穿透清晰度可為430以下。 支撐片的穿透清晰度,以JIS K 7374-2007為準則而測定。The penetration clarity of the support sheet is preferably 30 or more, more preferably 100 or more, and particularly preferably 200 or more. With the above-mentioned penetration sharpness in this range, it is easier to confirm the floating peeling of the protective film forming film, unsuitable printing and defects, etc. via the support sheet. The penetration clarity of the support sheet is not particularly limited. For example, the above-mentioned penetration sharpness may be 430 or less. The penetration clarity of the support sheet was measured according to JIS K 7374-2007.

接著,詳細說明關於構成支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的各層。Next, each layer constituting the composite sheet for forming the support sheet and the protective film will be described in detail.

○基材 上述基材為片材狀或膜狀,具有凹凸面。○Base material The above-mentioned substrate is in the form of a sheet or a film, and has an uneven surface.

在本說明書中,「凹凸面」,是指依JIS B 0601:2013所制訂的最大高度粗糙度Rz為0.01μm以上的面。 此外,「平滑面」是指不是凹凸面而為平滑度高的面,亦稱為「非凹凸面」或「光滑面」。例如,平滑面亦包含未達上述凹凸面程度的極小的凹凸度的面。In this specification, the "concavo-convex surface" refers to a surface that has a maximum height roughness Rz of 0.01 μm or more as prescribed by JIS B 0601:2013. In addition, "smooth surface" refers to a surface that is not uneven and has high smoothness, and is also called "non-concave surface" or "smooth surface". For example, the smooth surface also includes a surface with extremely small unevenness that does not reach the above-mentioned uneven surface.

在基材中,可僅單面為凹凸面,亦可兩面皆為凹凸面,但以僅單面為凹凸面為佳。換言之,在上述基材中,以僅單面為平滑面為佳。在支撐片中,基材的凹凸面成為包括黏著劑層側的面。In the base material, only one surface may be an uneven surface, or both surfaces may be an uneven surface, but it is preferable that only one surface is an uneven surface. In other words, in the above-mentioned base material, it is preferable that only one surface is a smooth surface. In the support sheet, the uneven surface of the base material becomes the surface including the adhesive layer side.

基材可為由1層(單層)而成者,亦可為由2層以上的複數層而成者,由複數層而成時,此等複數層可彼此相同亦可相異,此等複數層的組合並無特別限定。 當基材為由複數層而成時,此等複數層當中的最外層的面(最靠近黏著劑層的面,或是距離黏著劑層最靠近及最遠的面的兩面)成為上述凹凸面。The base material may be composed of one layer (single layer), or composed of more than two plural layers, and when composed of plural layers, these plural layers may be the same as or different from each other, etc. The combination of plural layers is not particularly limited. When the base material is composed of a plurality of layers, the outermost surface (the surface closest to the adhesive layer or the two surfaces closest to and farthest from the adhesive layer) of the plurality of layers becomes the above-mentioned uneven surface .

在本說明書中,不限於基材的情況,「複數層彼此可相同亦可相異」,是指「可以是全部的層相同,亦可是全部的層相異,亦可是僅一部分的層相同」,再者「複數層彼此相異」是指「各層的構成材料及厚度的至少一者相異」。In this specification, it is not limited to the case of a substrate, and "a plurality of layers may be the same or different from each other", meaning "all layers may be the same, all layers may be different, or only a part of the layers may be the same" In addition, "the plural layers are different from each other" means "at least one of the constituent materials and the thickness of each layer is different."

在基材的包括黏著劑層的側的凹凸面(第一面)中,以JIS B 0601:2013為準則所測定的最大高度粗糙度(Rz),以0.01~8μm為佳,以0.1~7μm為更佳,以0.5~6μm為特佳。藉由基材的上述Rz為上述下限值以上,將基材單獨捲取成輥狀,可抑制在解捲時的不順暢的發生。再者,在支撐片或保護膜形成用複合片的製造過程中,對於包含基材的積層物,同樣地可抑制捲取、解捲時的不順暢的發生。另一方面,藉由基材的上述Rz為上述上限值以下,黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜的積層性,以及保護膜或保護膜形成用膜的隔著支撐片的印字辨識性皆變得良好。In the uneven surface (first surface) of the side of the substrate including the adhesive layer, the maximum height roughness (Rz) measured according to JIS B 0601:2013 is preferably 0.01 to 8 μm, preferably 0.1 to 7 μm For better, 0.5~6μm is especially good. When the Rz of the base material is equal to or higher than the lower limit value, the base material is individually wound into a roll shape, and the occurrence of unsmoothness during unwinding can be suppressed. In addition, in the manufacturing process of the support sheet or the composite sheet for forming a protective film, the layered product including the base material can similarly prevent the occurrence of irregularities during winding and unwinding. On the other hand, when the Rz of the base material is equal to or less than the upper limit, the lamination of the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film, and the legibility of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film through the support sheet are both Become good.

當基材的兩面皆為凹凸面時,此兩面的凹凸度可彼此相同,亦可相異。When both sides of the substrate are uneven surfaces, the unevenness of the two surfaces may be the same or different.

作為上述基材的構成材料,可列舉,例如,各種樹脂。 作為上述樹脂,可列舉,例如,低密度聚乙烯(LDPE)、直鏈低密度聚乙烯(LLDPE)、高密度聚乙烯(HDPE)等的聚乙烯;聚丙烯、聚丁烯、聚丁二烯、聚甲基戊烯、降莰烯樹脂等的聚乙烯以外的聚烯烴;乙烯-乙酸乙烯酯共聚物、乙烯-(甲基)丙烯酸共聚物、乙烯-(甲基)丙烯酸酯共聚物、乙烯-降莰烯共聚物等的乙烯系共聚物(使用乙烯作為單體所獲得的共聚物);聚氯乙烯、氯乙烯共聚物等的氯乙烯系樹脂(使用氯乙烯作為單體所獲得的樹脂);聚苯乙烯;聚環烯烴;聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯、聚萘二甲酸乙二酯、聚對苯二甲酸丁二酯、聚間苯二甲酸乙二酯(poly(ethylene isophthalate))、聚乙烯-2,6-萘二羧酸酯、全部的構成單元為具有芳香族環式基的全芳香族聚酯等的聚酯;2種以上的上述聚酯的共聚物;聚(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚氨酯;聚氨酯丙烯酸酯;聚醯亞胺;聚醯胺;聚碳酸酯;氟樹脂;聚縮醛;改質聚苯醚;聚硫化苯;聚碸;聚醚酮等。 此外,作為上述樹脂,可列舉,例如,將上述聚酯與其以外的樹脂的混合物等的聚合物摻合物(polymer alloy)。上述聚酯與其以外的樹脂的聚合物摻合物,以聚酯以外的樹脂的量為較少量者為佳。 此外,作為上述樹脂,亦可列舉,例如,目前為止所例示的上述樹脂的1種或2種以上進行交聯的交聯樹脂;使用目前為止所例示的上述樹脂的1種或2種以上的離子聚合物等的改質樹脂。As a constituent material of the above-mentioned base material, for example, various resins may be mentioned. Examples of the resins include polyethylenes such as low-density polyethylene (LDPE), linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE), and high-density polyethylene (HDPE); polypropylene, polybutene, and polybutadiene Polyolefins other than polyethylene such as polymethylpentene and norbornene resin; ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, ethylene-(meth)acrylic acid copolymer, ethylene-(meth)acrylate copolymer, ethylene -Vinyl copolymers such as norbornene copolymers (copolymers obtained using ethylene as a monomer); vinyl chloride resins such as polyvinyl chloride and vinyl chloride copolymers (resins obtained using vinyl chloride as a monomer) ); Polystyrene; Polycycloolefin; Polyethylene terephthalate, Polyethylene naphthalate, Polybutylene terephthalate, Poly(ethylene isophthalate) ), polyethylene-2,6-naphthalene dicarboxylate, all structural units are polyesters such as fully aromatic polyesters having aromatic ring groups; copolymers of two or more of the above polyesters; poly( Meth)acrylate; polyurethane; polyurethane acrylate; polyimide; polyamide; polycarbonate; fluororesin; polyacetal; modified polyphenylene ether; polysulfide benzene; polysulfone; polyetherketone, etc. In addition, as the above-mentioned resin, for example, a polymer alloy (polymer alloy) such as a mixture of the above-mentioned polyester and other resins may be mentioned. The polymer blend of the above-mentioned polyester and resins other than that is preferably a smaller amount of resins other than polyester. In addition, as the above-mentioned resin, for example, a cross-linked resin in which one or more of the above-mentioned resins exemplified above are cross-linked; and one or more of the above-mentioned resins exemplified above are used. Modified resins such as ionic polymers.

在本說明書中,「(甲基)丙烯酸」為包含「丙烯酸」及「甲基丙烯酸」兩者的概念。關於與(甲基)丙烯酸類似的用語也是同樣的意思,例如,「(甲基)丙烯醯基」為包含「丙烯醯基」及「甲基丙烯醯基」兩者的概念,「(甲基)丙烯酸酯」為包含「丙烯酸酯」及「甲基丙烯酸酯」兩者的概念。In this specification, "(meth)acrylic acid" includes both "acrylic acid" and "methacrylic acid". The same meaning applies to terms similar to (meth)acrylic acid, for example, "(meth)acryloyl" is a concept that includes both "acryloyl" and "methacryloyl", "(meth ") Acrylate" is a concept that includes both "acrylate" and "methacrylate".

構成基材的樹脂可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇其組合及比率。The resin constituting the base material may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, the combination and ratio may be arbitrarily selected.

基材的厚度,以在50~300μm範圍內為佳,以在60~150μm範圍內為更佳。藉由基材的厚度在此種範圍內,更提升上述保護膜形成用複合片的可撓性及對半導體晶圓或半導體晶片的貼附性。 由於基材如上述,具有凹凸面,其厚度依基材的部位而變動。因此,基材的厚度的最小值可以是上述下限值以上,基材的厚度的最大值可以是上述上限值以下。 另外,「基材的厚度」,是指基材全體的厚度,例如,由複數層而構成的基材的厚度,是指構成基材的全部的層的合計厚度。The thickness of the substrate is preferably in the range of 50 to 300 μm, and more preferably in the range of 60 to 150 μm. When the thickness of the base material is within such a range, the flexibility of the composite sheet for forming a protective film and the adhesion to a semiconductor wafer or a semiconductor wafer are further improved. Since the base material has an uneven surface as described above, its thickness varies depending on the position of the base material. Therefore, the minimum value of the thickness of the base material may be equal to or greater than the above lower limit value, and the maximum value of the thickness of the base material may be equal to or less than the upper limit value. In addition, the "thickness of the substrate" refers to the thickness of the entire substrate, for example, the thickness of the substrate composed of a plurality of layers refers to the total thickness of all the layers constituting the substrate.

基材的厚度,例如,可藉由使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察基材的側面或剖面而測定。 基材的剖面,以例如,與在上述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的試片中剖面時同樣的方法而形成。The thickness of the substrate can be measured, for example, by using a scanning electron microscope (SEM) to observe the side surface or cross section of the substrate. The cross section of the substrate is formed, for example, in the same manner as in the cross section of the test piece of the above-mentioned composite sheet for forming a support sheet and a protective film.

例如,藉由先前說明的方法,從支撐片或保護膜形成用複合片的複數處(例如5處)切出試片,在此試片中,求得基材的厚度的最小值及最大值,從此等的值進一步求得此等最小值的平均值及最大值的平均值時,上述最小值的平均值可以為上述基材的厚度的下限值以上,上述最大值的平均值可以為上述基材的厚度的上限值以下。For example, according to the method described previously, a test piece is cut out from a plurality of places (for example, 5 places) of a composite sheet for forming a support sheet or a protective film, and in this test piece, the minimum and maximum thickness of the base material is obtained When the average value of the minimum value and the maximum value are further obtained from these values, the average value of the minimum value may be equal to or greater than the lower limit of the thickness of the substrate, and the average value of the maximum value may be The upper limit of the thickness of the base material is equal to or less than.

除了上述樹脂等主要構成材料以外,基材亦可含有填充材、著色劑、抗靜電劑、抗氧化劑、有機潤滑劑、觸媒、軟化劑(塑化劑)等習知的各種添加劑。In addition to the main constituent materials such as the above resins, the base material may contain various conventional additives such as fillers, colorants, antistatic agents, antioxidants, organic lubricants, catalysts, and softeners (plasticizers).

基材以透明為佳。 基材可對應目的而使其著色,亦可蒸鍍有其他層。 例如,當保護膜形成用膜為能量線硬化性時,基材,以能量線能夠穿透者為佳。The substrate is preferably transparent. The base material can be colored according to the purpose, and other layers can also be evaporated. For example, when the film for forming a protective film is energy ray curable, the substrate is preferably one that can penetrate energy ray.

為了提升基材與設置於其上的黏著劑層等直接接觸的層之間的密著性,可為在表面實施有電暈放電處理、電子束照射處理、電漿處理、臭氧-紫外線照射處理、火焰處理、鉻酸處理、熱風處理等氧化處理等者。 此外,基材亦可為在表面實施底塗處理者。 此外,基材亦可具有抗靜電塗層;將保護膜形成用複合片疊合而保存時,防止基材接著於其他片材、防止基材接著於抽真空檯的層等。In order to improve the adhesion between the substrate and the layer directly in contact with the adhesive layer provided thereon, corona discharge treatment, electron beam irradiation treatment, plasma treatment, ozone-ultraviolet irradiation treatment may be performed on the surface , Flame treatment, chromic acid treatment, hot air treatment and other oxidation treatments. In addition, the base material may be a primer applied to the surface. In addition, the substrate may also have an antistatic coating; when the composite film for forming a protective film is laminated and stored, the substrate is prevented from adhering to other sheets, the substrate is prevented from being attached to the layer of the vacuum table, etc.

基材可藉由習知的方法製造。例如,含有樹脂的基材可藉由將含有上述樹脂的樹脂組合物成形而製造。The substrate can be manufactured by a conventional method. For example, a resin-containing substrate can be produced by molding a resin composition containing the above resin.

使用未具有凹凸面的基材(換言之,兩面為平滑面的基材)時,亦可將基材的平滑面予以凹凸化處理。 凹凸化處理可藉由習知方法進行。例如,藉由使用具有凹凸面的金屬輥或金屬板,將其上述凹凸面加壓押附在基材的平滑面,可將基材的平滑面予以凹凸化處理。此時,以被加熱狀態的金屬輥或金屬板加壓押附在基材的平滑面為佳。此外,基材的平滑面亦可藉由噴砂處理或溶劑處理等而予以凹凸化處理。When a base material having no uneven surface (in other words, a base material having smooth surfaces on both sides) is used, the smooth surface of the base material may be uneven. The roughening process can be performed by a conventional method. For example, by using a metal roller or a metal plate having an uneven surface, and pressing the above uneven surface onto the smooth surface of the base material, the smooth surface of the base material can be unevenly processed. At this time, it is preferable that the heated metal roller or metal plate is pressed against the smooth surface of the base material. In addition, the smooth surface of the base material may also be roughened by sandblasting or solvent treatment.

○黏著劑層 上述黏著劑層為片材狀或膜狀。 在黏著劑層中,通常,無論基材與黏著劑層之間有無中間層,仍受到基材的上述凹凸面的影響,至少在基材側的面為凹凸面。○Adhesive layer The adhesive layer is in the form of a sheet or a film. In the adhesive layer, generally, regardless of whether there is an intermediate layer between the base material and the adhesive layer, it is still affected by the above-mentioned uneven surface of the base material, and at least the surface on the base material side is an uneven surface.

黏著劑層可為僅由1層(單層)而構成,亦可為由2層以上的複數層而構成,由複數層構成時,此等複數層可彼此相同亦可相異,此等複數層的組合並無特別限定。 黏著劑層為由複數層構成時,此等複數層當中的最外層的面(最靠近基材的面)為上述凹凸面。The adhesive layer may be composed of only one layer (single layer), or may be composed of more than two plural layers. When composed of plural layers, the plural layers may be the same as or different from each other. The combination of layers is not particularly limited. When the adhesive layer is composed of a plurality of layers, the surface of the outermost layer (the surface closest to the substrate) among the plurality of layers is the above-mentioned uneven surface.

在此,一邊參照圖式,一邊詳細說明關於基材及黏著劑層。 圖4是例示本發明一實施形態相關的保護膜形成用複合片的放大剖面圖。在此,舉圖1所示的保護膜形成用複合片1A為例進行說明。另外,在圖4中,省略剝離膜的圖示。Here, the base material and the adhesive layer will be described in detail while referring to the drawings. 4 is an enlarged cross-sectional view illustrating a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention. Here, the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 1 will be described as an example. In addition, in FIG. 4, illustration of the release film is omitted.

如先前的說明,基材11的第一面11a為凹凸面。然後,黏著劑層12以直接接觸基材11的第一面(凹凸面)11a而設置,黏著劑層12的第二面12b變得易於服貼基材11的第一面11a。因此,黏著劑層12的第二面12b亦為凹凸面。As previously described, the first surface 11a of the base material 11 is a concave-convex surface. Then, the adhesive layer 12 is provided to directly contact the first surface (concavo-convex surface) 11 a of the base material 11, and the second surface 12 b of the adhesive layer 12 becomes easy to adhere to the first surface 11 a of the base material 11. Therefore, the second surface 12b of the adhesive layer 12 is also an uneven surface.

黏著劑層12的厚度Ta 未必為定值,依黏著劑層12的部位而變動。在此,黏著劑層12的厚度的最小值以符號Ta1 表示,黏著劑層12的厚度的最大值以符號Ta2 表示。Adhesive layer thickness T a 12 is not necessarily a constant value, depending on the portion of adhesive layer 12 varies. Here, the minimum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer 12 is represented by the symbol T a1 , and the maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer 12 is represented by the symbol T a2 .

在保護膜形成用複合片1A中,從其5處切出試片,在此等5片的試驗片中,形成剖面,在此新形成的剖面中,求得個別黏著劑層的厚度的最小值Ta1 及最大值Ta2 。然後,從至少5個的Ta1 ,求得其平均值(上述S值),為1.5μm以上;從至少5個的Ta2 值,求得其平均值(上述L值),為9μm以下。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, test pieces were cut out from 5 of them, and a cross section was formed among these 5 test pieces. In this newly formed section, the minimum thickness of the individual adhesive layer was obtained The value T a1 and the maximum value T a2 . Then, from at least 5 T a1 , the average value (the above S value) is 1.5 μm or more; from at least 5 T a2 values, the average value (the above L value) is 9 μm or less.

從保護膜形成用複合片1A切出試片、在試片上形成剖面、測定在上述剖面之黏著劑層的厚度的最小值Ta1 及最大值Ta2 ,如同先前所說明,與由未構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片切出試片的情況,同樣地進行。A test piece was cut out from the composite sheet for protective film formation 1A, a cross-section was formed on the test piece, and the minimum value T a1 and the maximum value T a2 of the thickness of the adhesive layer on the above-mentioned cross-section were measured. The test piece was cut out in the same way as the support sheet of the composite sheet for film formation.

另外,未構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片的放大剖面圖,與在圖4中,省略保護膜形成用膜13的圖示者相同。In addition, the enlarged cross-sectional view of the support sheet that does not constitute the composite sheet for forming a protective film is the same as that in FIG. 4 in which the film 13 for forming the protective film is omitted.

作為保護膜形成用複合片1A,在此是表示在基材1與黏著劑層12之間,存在著基材1與黏著劑層12未貼合的區域(在本說明書中,有時稱為「非貼合區域」)91。但是,即使保護膜形成用複合片1A具有此類非貼合區域91,在保護膜形成用複合片1A的厚度方向之非貼合區域91的大小為例如0.5μm以下的保護膜形成用複合片1A,可謂其基材11與黏著劑層12間的積層性良好,具有良好的特性。The composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film means that there is a region where the substrate 1 and the adhesive layer 12 are not bonded between the substrate 1 and the adhesive layer 12 (in this specification, it is sometimes called "Non-fitting area" 91. However, even if the protective film forming composite sheet 1A has such a non-lamination area 91, the size of the non-lamination area 91 in the thickness direction of the protective film forming composite sheet 1A is, for example, 0.5 μm or less. 1A can be said to have good stackability between the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12 and has good characteristics.

另外,在本說明書中,「在保護膜形成用複合片的厚度方向之非貼合區域的大小」,是指「在保護膜形成用複合片中相鄰2層的在上述片材的厚度方向上的層間距離」,有時簡稱為「層間距離」。例如,上述「在保護膜形成用複合片1A的厚度方向上之非貼合區域91的大小」,是指「在上述片材1A的厚度方向上之基材11與黏著劑層12之間的層間距離」。 當1處的非貼合區域的大小(層間距離)有變動時,採用其最大值作為非貼合區域的大小(層間距離)。In addition, in this specification, "the size of the non-lamination area in the thickness direction of the composite sheet for protective film formation" means "the thickness direction of the sheet in the two adjacent layers in the composite sheet for protective film formation" "Interlayer distance above" is sometimes simply referred to as "interlayer distance". For example, the above “the size of the non-lamination area 91 in the thickness direction of the protective film forming composite sheet 1A” means “between the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12 in the thickness direction of the sheet 1A” Interlayer distance." When the size (interlayer distance) of the non-laminated region at one location changes, the maximum value is adopted as the size (interlayer distance) of the non-laminated region.

非貼合區域的大小(層間距離),例如,可藉由與上述黏著劑層的厚度的情況相同的方法而測定。亦即,可藉由與求取黏著劑層的厚度時相同方法,在保護膜形成用複合片的試片形成剖面,在此剖面,求得非貼合區域的大小。或是,亦可不製作試片,在保護膜形成用複合片本身形成剖面,在此剖面,求得非貼合區域的大小。The size (interlayer distance) of the non-laminated area can be measured by the same method as in the case of the thickness of the adhesive layer described above, for example. That is, a cross-section can be formed on the test piece of the composite film for forming a protective film by the same method as when obtaining the thickness of the adhesive layer, and at this cross-section, the size of the non-bonding region can be obtained. Alternatively, a test piece may not be prepared, and a cross-section may be formed on the composite film for forming a protective film. At this cross-section, the size of the non-lamination area may be obtained.

非貼合區域91的大小(上述層間距離),例如,可以是0.4μm以下、0.3μm以下、0.2μm以下及0.1μm以下的任一者。The size of the non-laminated region 91 (the above-mentioned interlayer distance) may be, for example, any one of 0.4 μm or less, 0.3 μm or less, 0.2 μm or less, and 0.1 μm or less.

在保護膜形成用複合片1A中,也有可能完全不存在非貼合區域91。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, the non-lamination area 91 may not exist at all.

在此,雖然舉保護膜形成用複合片1A為例來說明有關於基材及黏著劑層,但保護膜形成用複合片1B、保護膜形成用複合片1C等其他實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片的情況,基材及黏著劑層亦相同。Here, although the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1A is taken as an example to describe the base material and the adhesive layer, the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1B, the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1C and other embodiments are used for forming a protective film. In the case of the composite sheet, the substrate and the adhesive layer are also the same.

若黏著劑層的S值為1.5μm以上且未達9μm,則無特別限定,但以1.7μm以上為佳,以1.9μm以上為更佳,例如,可以是2.3μm以上、2.7μm以上、3.1μm以上及3.5μm以上的任一者。藉由上述S值為上述下限值以上,黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜間的積層性變得更良好。If the S value of the adhesive layer is 1.5 μm or more and less than 9 μm, it is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 1.7 μm or more, more preferably 1.9 μm or more, for example, it may be 2.3 μm or more, 2.7 μm or more, 3.1 Any one of μm or more and 3.5 μm or more. When the S value is equal to or higher than the lower limit value, the lamination property between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film becomes better.

另一方面,黏著劑層的S值,例如,可以是8μm以下。此類黏著劑層可更容易形成。On the other hand, the S value of the adhesive layer may be, for example, 8 μm or less. Such an adhesive layer can be formed more easily.

黏著劑層的S值,可將上述較佳下限值及上限值任意組合而在設定的範圍內適當調節。例如,黏著劑層的S值,以1.5~8μm為佳,以1.7~8μm為更佳,以1.9~8μm為進一步更佳,例如,可以是2.3~8μm、2.7~8μm、3.1~8μm及3.5~8μm的任一者。但是,此等為黏著劑層的S值的一例。The S value of the adhesive layer can be arbitrarily adjusted within a set range by arbitrarily combining the above-described preferred lower limit value and upper limit value. For example, the S value of the adhesive layer is preferably from 1.5 to 8 μm, more preferably from 1.7 to 8 μm, and even more preferably from 1.9 to 8 μm, for example, it can be 2.3 to 8 μm, 2.7 to 8 μm, 3.1 to 8 μm, and 3.5 Any of ~8μm. However, these are examples of the S value of the adhesive layer.

黏著劑層的L值,只要是9μm以下且大於1.5μm,則無特別限定,但以8.6μm以下為佳,以8.3μm以下為更佳,例如,可以是7.7μm以下、7.3μm以下、6.9μm以下及6.5μm以下的任一者。藉由上述L值為上述上限值以下,保護膜或保護膜形成用膜的隔著支撐片的印字辨識性變得更良好。The L value of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited as long as it is 9 μm or less and more than 1.5 μm, but it is preferably 8.6 μm or less, more preferably 8.3 μm or less, for example, 7.7 μm or less, 7.3 μm or less, 6.9 Any one of less than μm and less than 6.5 μm. When the L value is equal to or lower than the upper limit value, the legibility of the protective film or the protective film forming film through the support sheet becomes better.

另一方面,黏著劑層的L值,例如,可以是2.5μm以上。此類黏著劑層變得更容易形成。On the other hand, the L value of the adhesive layer may be 2.5 μm or more, for example. Such an adhesive layer becomes easier to form.

黏著劑層的L值,可將上述較佳下限值及上限值任意組合而在設定的範圍內適當調節。例如,黏著劑層的L值,以2.5~9μm為佳,以2.5~8.6μm為更佳,以2.5~8.3μm為進一步更佳,例如,可以是2.5~7.7μm、2.5~7.3μm、2.5~6.9μm及2.5~6.5μm的任一者。The L value of the adhesive layer can be appropriately adjusted within a set range by arbitrarily combining the above-described preferred lower limit value and upper limit value. For example, the L value of the adhesive layer is preferably 2.5 to 9 μm, more preferably 2.5 to 8.6 μm, and even more preferably 2.5 to 8.3 μm. For example, it can be 2.5 to 7.7 μm, 2.5 to 7.3 μm, 2.5 Any one of ~6.9μm and 2.5~6.5μm.

黏著劑層的厚度(例如,Ta ),只要滿足上述S值及L值的條件,則無特別限定。 例如,黏著劑層的厚度,可以是1.5~9μm。The thickness (for example, T a ) of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited as long as the conditions of the S value and the L value described above are satisfied. For example, the thickness of the adhesive layer may be 1.5-9 μm.

且,「黏著劑層的厚度」,是指黏著劑層全體的厚度,例如,由複數層而構成的黏著劑層的厚度,是指構成黏著劑層的全部的層的合計厚度。由此種觀點,制定上述黏著劑層的厚度的最小值及最大值。The "thickness of the adhesive layer" refers to the thickness of the entire adhesive layer. For example, the thickness of the adhesive layer composed of a plurality of layers refers to the total thickness of all the layers constituting the adhesive layer. From this point of view, the minimum and maximum thicknesses of the adhesive layer are determined.

黏著劑層含有黏著劑。 作為上述黏著劑,可列舉,例如,丙烯酸系樹脂、胺甲酸乙酯系樹脂、橡膠系樹脂、矽酮系樹脂、環氧系樹脂、聚乙烯醚、聚碳酸酯、酯系樹脂等的黏著性樹脂,以丙烯酸系樹脂為佳。The adhesive layer contains an adhesive. Examples of the adhesive include, for example, the adhesiveness of acrylic resin, urethane resin, rubber resin, silicone resin, epoxy resin, polyvinyl ether, polycarbonate, ester resin, etc. The resin is preferably an acrylic resin.

在本說明書中,「黏著性樹脂」是指包含具有黏著性的樹脂及具有接著性的樹脂兩者的概念,例如,不僅是樹脂本身具有黏著性質者,亦包含藉由與添加劑等其他成分並用而顯示黏著性的樹脂、藉由熱或水等觸發物(trigger)的存在而顯示接著性的樹脂等。In this specification, "adhesive resin" refers to the concept of including both adhesive resins and adhesive resins. For example, not only the resin itself has adhesive properties, but also includes the combination of additives and other components. On the other hand, resins showing adhesiveness, resins showing adhesion by the presence of a trigger such as heat or water, etc.

黏著劑層以透明為佳。 黏著劑層亦可對應目的而使其著色。 例如,當保護膜形成用膜為能量線硬化性時,以黏著劑層能被能量線穿透為佳。The adhesive layer is preferably transparent. The adhesive layer can also be colored according to the purpose. For example, when the film for forming a protective film is energy ray curable, it is preferable that the adhesive layer can be penetrated by the energy ray.

黏著劑層可以是使用能量線硬化性黏著劑而形成者,亦可以是使用非能量線硬化性黏著劑而形成者。使用能量線硬化性的黏著劑而形成的黏著劑層,可易於調節在硬化前及硬化後的物性。The adhesive layer may be formed using an energy ray hardening adhesive, or may be formed using a non-energy ray hardening adhesive. The adhesive layer formed by using energy ray-curable adhesive can easily adjust the physical properties before and after hardening.

>>黏著劑組合物>> 黏著劑層可使用含有黏著劑的黏著劑組合物而形成。例如,可在黏著劑層的形成對象面塗佈黏著劑組合物,視需要使其乾燥,在目標部位形成黏著劑層。黏著劑層的更具體的形成方法,與其以外的層的形成方法一併於稍後詳細說明。黏著劑組合物中的在常溫未氣化成分彼此的含量的比率,通常與黏著劑層的上述成分彼此的含量的比率相同。>>Adhesive composition>> The adhesive layer can be formed using an adhesive composition containing an adhesive. For example, the adhesive composition may be applied to the surface to be formed of the adhesive layer, dried if necessary, and an adhesive layer may be formed at the target site. The more specific method for forming the adhesive layer will be described in detail later together with the method for forming other layers. The ratio of the contents of the non-vaporized components at ordinary temperature in the adhesive composition is generally the same as the ratio of the contents of the above components of the adhesive layer.

在本說明書中,「常溫」,是指不特別冷、不特別熱的溫度,亦即平常的溫度,可列舉,例如,15~25℃的溫度等。In this specification, "normal temperature" refers to a temperature that is not particularly cold and not particularly hot, that is, an ordinary temperature, and may include, for example, a temperature of 15 to 25°C.

黏著劑組合物的塗佈可藉由習知的方法進行,例如,可列舉使用空氣刀塗佈機、刮刀塗佈機(blade coater)、桿塗佈機、凹版印刷塗佈機、軋輥塗佈機、輥刀塗佈機、簾幕塗佈機、模具塗佈機、刀式塗佈機(knife coater)、網版塗佈機、麥勒棒塗機(Meyer bar coater)、吻合式塗佈機(kiss coater)等各種塗佈機的方法。The application of the adhesive composition can be performed by a conventional method, and examples include air knife coaters, blade coaters, rod coaters, gravure coaters, and roll coaters. Machine, roll coater, curtain coater, die coater, knife coater, screen coater, Meyer bar coater, kiss coater Various coater methods such as kiss coater.

黏著劑組合物的乾燥條件並無特別限定,但當黏著劑組合物含有下述溶媒時,以使其加熱乾燥為佳。含有溶媒的黏著劑組合物,例如,以在70~130℃、10秒~5分鐘的條件使其乾燥為佳。The drying conditions of the adhesive composition are not particularly limited, but when the adhesive composition contains the following solvent, it is preferably dried by heating. The adhesive composition containing a solvent is preferably dried at 70 to 130° C. for 10 seconds to 5 minutes, for example.

當黏著劑層為能量線硬化性時,含有能量線硬化性黏著劑的黏著劑組合物,亦即,作為能量線硬化性的黏著劑組合物,可列舉,例如,含有非能量線硬化性的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)(以下,有時簡稱為「黏著性樹脂(I-1a)」)、能量線硬化性化合物的黏著劑組合物(I-1);含有在非能量線硬化性的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的側鏈導入不飽和基的能量線硬化性的黏著性樹脂(I-2a)(以下,有時簡稱為「黏著性樹脂(I-2a)」)的黏著劑組合物(I-2);含有上述黏著性樹脂(I-2a)、能量線硬化性化合物的黏著劑組合物(I-3)等。When the adhesive layer is energy ray-curable, the adhesive composition containing the energy ray-curable adhesive, that is, as the energy ray-curable adhesive composition, for example, those containing non-energy ray-curable Adhesive composition (I-1a) of adhesive resin (I-1a) (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "adhesive resin (I-1a)"), energy ray-curable compound; contained in non-energy ray-curable Adhesive resin (I-1a) has a side chain in which unsaturated groups are introduced into the energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-2a) (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "adhesive resin (I-2a)") Adhesive composition (I-2); Adhesive composition (I-3) containing the above-mentioned adhesive resin (I-2a), energy ray-curable compound, etc.

>黏著劑組合物(I-1)> 上述黏著劑組合物(I-1),如上述,含有非能量線硬化性的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)及能量線硬化性化合物。>Adhesive composition (I-1)> As described above, the adhesive composition (I-1) contains a non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a) and an energy ray-curable compound.

[黏著性樹脂(I-1a)] 上述黏著性樹脂(I-1a),以丙烯酸系樹脂為佳。 作為上述丙烯酸系樹脂,可列舉,例如,至少具有來自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的構成單元的丙烯酸系聚合物。 上述丙烯酸系樹脂所具有的構成單元可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。[Adhesive resin (I-1a)] The adhesive resin (I-1a) is preferably an acrylic resin. Examples of the acrylic resin include, for example, acrylic polymers having at least a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate. The structural units of the acrylic resin may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

作為上述(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯,可列舉,例如,構成烷基酯的烷基的碳數為1~20者,上述烷基,以直鏈狀或分支鏈狀為佳。 作為(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯,更具體而言,可列舉,(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二酯 ((甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四酯((甲基)丙烯酸肉豆蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六酯((甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八酯((甲基)丙烯酸硬脂醯酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十九酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二十酯等。Examples of the alkyl (meth)acrylate include, for example, those having an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group is preferably linear or branched. More specific examples of alkyl (meth)acrylates include methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, and isopropyl (meth)acrylate. Ester, n-butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, secondary butyl (meth)acrylate, tertiary butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, (A Group) hexyl acrylate, heptyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, isooctyl (meth) acrylate, n-octyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylate Nonyl ester, isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, dodecyl (meth)acrylate (lauryl (meth)acrylate), (methyl ) Tridecyl acrylate, tetradecyl (meth)acrylate (myristyl (meth)acrylate), pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, hexadecyl (meth)acrylate (palmityl (meth)acrylate) ), heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, stearyl (meth)acrylate (stearyl (meth)acrylate), nineteen (meth)acrylate, arachidyl (meth)acrylate, etc.

從提升黏著劑層的黏著力的觀點而言,上述丙烯酸系聚合物,以具有上述烷基的碳數為4以上的來自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的構成單元者為佳。然後,從更提升黏著劑層的黏著力的觀點而言,上述烷基的碳數,以4~12為佳,以4~8為更佳。此外,上述烷基的碳數為4以上的(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯,以丙烯酸烷基酯為佳。From the viewpoint of enhancing the adhesive force of the adhesive layer, the acrylic polymer is preferably a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate having a carbon number of the alkyl group of 4 or more. Then, from the viewpoint of further improving the adhesion of the adhesive layer, the carbon number of the alkyl group is preferably 4-12, and more preferably 4-8. The alkyl (meth)acrylate having 4 or more carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably an alkyl acrylate.

上述丙烯酸系聚合物,除了來自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的的構成單元以外,以進一步具有來自含官能基的單體的構成單元為佳。 作為上述含官能基的單體,可列舉,例如,藉由上述官能基與下述交聯劑反應而成為交聯的起點,上述官能基與下述含不飽和基的化合物中的不飽和基反應,而可在丙烯酸系聚合物的側鏈導入不飽和基者。The acrylic polymer preferably has a structural unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer in addition to a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate. Examples of the functional group-containing monomer include, for example, the functional group and the following cross-linking agent to become a starting point for cross-linking, the functional group and the unsaturated group in the unsaturated group-containing compound below It is possible to introduce unsaturated groups into the side chain of the acrylic polymer by reaction.

作為含官能基的單體中的上述官能基,可列舉,例如,羥基、羧基、胺基、環氧基等。 亦即,作為含官能基的單體,可列舉,例如,含羥基的單體、含羧基的單體、含胺基的單體、含環氧基的單體等。Examples of the functional group in the functional group-containing monomer include, for example, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, an amine group, and an epoxy group. That is, examples of the functional group-containing monomer include, for example, a hydroxyl group-containing monomer, a carboxyl group-containing monomer, an amine group-containing monomer, and an epoxy group-containing monomer.

作為上述含羥基的單體,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯酸羥甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸4-羥丁酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸羥烷基酯;乙烯醇、烯丙醇等的非(甲基)丙烯酸系不飽和醇(不具有(甲基)丙烯醯基骨架的不飽和醇)等。Examples of the hydroxyl group-containing monomers include, for example, hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth)acrylic acid 3. -Hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates such as hydroxypropyl ester, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate; ethylene Non-(meth)acrylic unsaturated alcohols such as alcohols and allyl alcohols (unsaturated alcohols that do not have a (meth)acryloyl skeleton) and the like.

作為上述含羧基的單體,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯酸、丁烯酸等的乙烯性不飽和單羧酸(具有乙烯性不飽和鍵結的單羧酸);富馬酸、伊康酸、馬來酸、檸康酸等的乙烯性不飽和二羧酸(具有乙烯性不飽和鍵結的二羧酸);上述乙烯性不飽和二羧酸的酸酐;甲基丙烯酸2-羧乙酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸羧烷基酯等。Examples of the carboxyl group-containing monomers include, for example, (meth)acrylic acid, crotonic acid and other ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acids (monocarboxylic acids having an ethylenically unsaturated bond); fumaric acid, and Ethylene unsaturated dicarboxylic acids (condensation of dicarboxylic acids with ethylenically unsaturated bonds) such as carboxylic acid, maleic acid, citraconic acid, etc.; anhydrides of the above ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids; 2-carboxyl methacrylic acid Carboxyalkyl (meth)acrylates such as ethyl esters.

含官能基的單體,以含羥基的單體、含羧基的單體為佳,以含羥基的單體為更佳。The functional group-containing monomer is preferably a hydroxyl group-containing monomer or a carboxyl group-containing monomer, and more preferably a hydroxyl group-containing monomer.

上述構成丙烯酸系聚合物的含官能基的單體,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The functional group-containing monomer constituting the acrylic polymer may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在上述丙烯酸系聚合物中,來自含官能基的單體的構成單元的含量,相對於構成單元的全部量,以1~35質量%為佳,以2~30質量%為更佳,以3~27質量%為特佳。In the above-mentioned acrylic polymer, the content of the structural unit derived from the functional group-containing monomer is preferably 1 to 35% by mass, more preferably 2 to 30% by mass relative to the total amount of the constituent unit, and 3 ~27% by mass is particularly good.

上述丙烯酸系聚合物,來自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的的構成單元及來自含官能基的單體的構成單元以外,亦可進一步具有來自其他單體的構成單元。 上述其他單體,只要是可與(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯等共聚合者,則無特別限定。 作為上述其他單體,可列舉,例如,苯乙烯、α-甲基苯乙烯、乙烯甲苯、甲酸乙烯酯、乙酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈、丙烯醯胺等。The above-mentioned acrylic polymer may have structural units derived from other monomers in addition to the structural units derived from the alkyl (meth)acrylate and the structural units derived from the functional group-containing monomer. The other monomers described above are not particularly limited as long as they can be copolymerized with alkyl (meth)acrylate or the like. Examples of the other monomers mentioned above include styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, vinyl formate, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, and acrylic amide.

構成上述丙烯酸系聚合物的上述其他單體,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The other monomers constituting the acrylic polymer may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

上述丙烯酸系聚合物可作為上述非能量線硬化性的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)使用。 另一方面,將具有能量線聚合性不飽和基(能量線聚合性基)的含不飽和基的化合物與上述丙烯酸系聚合物中的官能基反應後的產物,可作為上述能量線硬化性的黏著性樹脂(I-2a)使用。The acrylic polymer can be used as the non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a). On the other hand, a product obtained by reacting an unsaturated group-containing compound having an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group (energy ray polymerizable group) with a functional group in the acrylic polymer can be used as the above energy ray-curable Adhesive resin (I-2a) is used.

黏著劑組合物(I-1)含有的黏著性樹脂(I-1a),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The adhesive resin (I-1a) contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one type, or two or more types, and if there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-1)中,黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的含量,相對於黏著劑組合物(I-1)的總質量,以5~99質量%為佳,以10~95質量%為更佳,以15~90質量%為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass relative to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-1), and 10 to 10 95% by mass is better, and 15 to 90% by mass is particularly good.

[能量線硬化性化合物] 作為黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的上述能量線硬化性化合物,可列舉具有能量線聚合性不飽和基,可藉由能量線的照射而硬化的單體或寡聚體。 能量線硬化性化合物當中,作為單體,可列舉,例如,三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,4-丁二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,6-己二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯等的多價(甲基)丙烯酸酯;胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚醚(甲基)丙烯酸酯;環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。 能量線硬化性化合物當中,作為寡聚體,可列舉,例如,將上述所例示的單體進行聚合而成的寡聚體等。 能量線硬化性化合物,從分子量較大、黏著劑層的儲存模數(storage modulus)難以變低的觀點而言,以胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯、胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚體為佳。[Energy Ray Hardening Compound] Examples of the energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) include monomers or oligomers that have an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group and can be cured by irradiation with energy ray. Among the energy ray-curable compounds, examples of the monomer include trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, neopentyl alcohol (meth)acrylate, neopentyl alcohol (meth)acrylic acid. Esters, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, 1,4-butanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol (meth)acrylate, etc. ) Acrylate; urethane (meth)acrylate; polyester (meth)acrylate; polyether (meth)acrylate; epoxy (meth)acrylate, etc. Among the energy ray-curable compounds, examples of oligomers include, for example, oligomers obtained by polymerizing the monomers exemplified above. The energy ray-curable compound has urethane (meth)acrylate and urethane (methyl) from the viewpoint that the molecular weight is large and the storage modulus of the adhesive layer is difficult to decrease. Acrylic oligomers are preferred.

黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的上述能量線硬化性化合物,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The above energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在上述黏著劑組合物(I-1)中,上述能量線硬化性化合物的含量,相對於黏著劑組合物(I-1)的總質量,以1~95質量%為佳,以5~90質量%為更佳,以10~85質量%為特佳。In the above adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the energy ray hardening compound is preferably 1 to 95% by mass relative to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-1), and 5 to 90 The mass% is better, with 10~85 mass% being particularly good.

[交聯劑] 作為黏著性樹脂(I-1a),除了來自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的的構成單元以外,當使用具有來自含官能基的單體的構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合物時,黏著劑組合物(I-1),以進一步含有交聯劑為佳。[Crosslinking agent] As the adhesive resin (I-1a), in addition to the structural unit derived from the alkyl (meth)acrylate, when the above acrylic polymer having the structural unit derived from the functional group-containing monomer is used, the adhesive is combined It is preferred that the substance (I-1) further contains a crosslinking agent.

上述交聯劑,例如為與上述官能基反應,而使黏著性樹脂(I-1a)彼此交聯者。 作為交聯劑,可列舉,例如,甲苯二異氰酸酯、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、伸茬基二異氰酸酯、此等二異氰酸酯的加成物等的異氰酸酯系交聯劑(具有異氰酸酯基的交聯劑);乙二醇環氧丙醚等的環氧系交聯劑(具有環氧丙基的交聯劑);六[1-(2-甲基)-氮丙啶基]三磷酸鹽三氮雜苯等的氮丙啶系交聯劑(具有氮丙啶基(aziridinyl)的交聯劑);鋁螯合等的金屬螯合系交聯劑(具有金屬螯合構造的交聯劑);異氰尿酸酯系交聯劑(具有異氰尿酸酯骨架的交聯劑)等。 從提升黏著劑的凝集力而提升黏著劑層的黏著力的觀點以及易於取得等的觀點而言,交聯劑以異氰酸酯系交聯劑為佳。The above-mentioned cross-linking agent is, for example, one that reacts with the above-mentioned functional group and cross-links the adhesive resins (I-1a). Examples of the crosslinking agent include isocyanate-based crosslinking agents (crosslinking agents having isocyanate groups) such as toluene diisocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, stubble diisocyanate, and adducts of these diisocyanates. ); epoxy-based cross-linking agent such as ethylene glycol glycidyl ether (cross-linking agent with glycidyl group); hexa[1-(2-methyl)-aziridinyl]triphosphate trinitrogen Aziridine-based crosslinking agents such as heterobenzenes (crosslinking agents with aziridinyl groups); metal chelate-based crosslinking agents such as aluminum chelates (crosslinking agents with metal chelation structures); Isocyanurate-based crosslinking agent (crosslinking agent having isocyanurate skeleton) and the like. The isocyanate-based crosslinking agent is preferred from the viewpoint of improving the cohesive force of the adhesive agent and enhancing the adhesive force of the adhesive layer and being easily available.

黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的交聯劑,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The crosslinking agent contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在上述黏著劑組合物(I-1)中,交聯劑的含量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的含量100質量份,以0.01~50質量份為佳,以0.1~20質量份為更佳,以0.3~15質量份為特佳。In the above adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the crosslinking agent is preferably 0.01 to 50 parts by mass, and 0.1 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a). For better, 0.3 to 15 parts by mass is particularly preferred.

[光聚合起始劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-1),以進一步含有光聚合起始劑為佳。含有光聚合起始劑的黏著劑組合物(I-1),即使照射紫外線等比較低能量的能量線,仍可進行充分的硬化反應。[Photopolymerization initiator] The adhesive composition (I-1) preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator. The adhesive composition (I-1) containing the photopolymerization initiator can perform sufficient hardening reaction even when irradiated with relatively low energy energy rays such as ultraviolet rays.

作為上述光聚合起始劑,可列舉,例如,苯偶姻、苯偶姻甲醚、苯偶姻乙醚、苯偶姻異丙醚、苯偶姻異丁醚、苯偶姻安息香酸、苯偶姻安息香酸甲酯、苯偶姻二甲基縮酮等的苯偶姻化合物;苯乙酮、2-羥基-2-甲基-1-苯基-丙烷-1-酮、2,2-二甲氧基-1,2-二苯乙烷-1-酮等的苯乙酮化合物;雙(2,4,6-三甲基苄醯基)苯基膦氧化物、2,4,6-三甲基苄醯基二苯基膦氧化物等的醯基膦氧化物化合物;苄基硫化苯(benzyl phenyl sulfide)、單硫化四甲基甲硫碳醯胺(tetramethylthiuram monosulfide)等的硫醚化合物;1-羥基環己基苯酮等的α-酮醇化合物;偶氮雙異丁腈等的偶氮化合物;二茂鈦(titanocene)等的二茂鈦化合物;硫雜蒽酮(thioxanthone)等的硫雜蒽酮化合物;過氧化物化合物;聯乙醯等的二酮化合物;苄;聯苄;二苯甲酮;2,4-二乙基硫雜蒽酮;1,2-二苯基甲烷;2-羥基-2-甲基-1-[4-(1-甲基乙烯基)苯基]丙酮;2-氯蒽醌等。Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include benzoin, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, benzoin isobutyl ether, benzoin benzoic acid, and benzoin Benzoin compounds such as methyl benzoate and benzoin dimethyl ketal; acetophenone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenyl-propane-1-one, 2,2-di Acetophenone compounds such as methoxy-1,2-diphenylethane-1-one; bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl)phenylphosphine oxide, 2,4,6- Acetylphosphine oxide compounds such as trimethylbenzyldiphenylphosphine oxide; sulfide compounds such as benzyl phenyl sulfide, tetramethylthiuram monosulfide ; Α-keto alcohol compounds such as 1-hydroxycyclohexyl benzophenone; azo compounds such as azobisisobutyronitrile; titanocene compounds such as titanocene; thioxanthone (thioxanthone) etc. Thioxanthone compounds; peroxide compounds; diketone compounds such as diacetyl; benzyl; bibenzyl; benzophenone; 2,4-diethylthioxanthone; 1,2-diphenylmethane ; 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-[4-(1-methylvinyl) phenyl] acetone; 2-chloroanthraquinone and so on.

黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的光聚合起始劑,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The photopolymerization initiator contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-1)中,光聚合起始劑的含量,相對於上述能量線硬化性化合物的含量100質量份,以0.01~20質量份為佳,以0.03~10質量份為更佳,以0.05~5質量份為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, and 0.03 to 10 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the above energy ray-curable compound. More preferably, 0.05 to 5 parts by mass is particularly preferred.

[其他添加劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-1),在無損本發明效果的範圍內,亦可含有非上述任一成分的其他添加劑。 作為上述其他添加劑,可列舉,例如,抗靜電劑、抗氧化劑、軟化劑(塑化劑)、填充材(填充劑)、防鏽劑、著色劑(顏料、染料)、增感劑、增黏劑、反應延遲劑、交聯促進劑(觸媒)等習知的添加劑。 且,作為反應延遲劑,例如,在保存中的黏著劑組合物(I-1),對混入黏著劑組合物(I-1)中的觸媒的作用所致非目標交聯反應的進行予以抑制。作為反應延遲劑,可列舉,例如,藉由對觸媒螯合而形成螯合錯合物者,更具體而言,可列舉在1分子中具有2個以上羰基(-C(=O)-)者。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-1) may contain other additives other than any of the components as long as the effect of the present invention is not impaired. Examples of the other additives mentioned above include antistatic agents, antioxidants, softeners (plasticizers), fillers (fillers), rust inhibitors, colorants (pigments, dyes), sensitizers, and tackifiers. Agents, reaction delay agents, crosslinking accelerators (catalysts) and other conventional additives. And, as a reaction delay agent, for example, the adhesive composition (I-1) in storage, the non-target crosslinking reaction due to the action of the catalyst mixed in the adhesive composition (I-1) is performed inhibition. As the reaction retarder, for example, a chelate complex is formed by chelating a catalyst, and more specifically, it has two or more carbonyl groups (-C(=O)- in one molecule). )By.

黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的其他添加劑,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The other additives contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-1)中,其他添加劑的含量並無特別限定,對應其種類適當選擇即可。In the adhesive composition (I-1), the content of other additives is not particularly limited, and it may be appropriately selected according to the type.

[溶媒] 黏著劑組合物(I-1)亦可含有溶媒。藉由黏著劑組合物(I-1)含有溶媒,可提升對於塗佈對象面的塗佈適性。[Solvent] The adhesive composition (I-1) may contain a solvent. Since the adhesive composition (I-1) contains a solvent, the coating suitability for the surface to be coated can be improved.

上述溶媒以有機溶媒為佳,作為上述有機溶媒,可列舉,例如,丁酮、丙酮等的酮;乙酸乙酯等的酯(羧酸酯);四氫呋喃、二㗁烷等的醚;環己烷、正己烷等的脂肪族烴;甲苯、二甲苯等的芳香族烴;1-丙醇、2-丙醇等的醇等。The solvent is preferably an organic solvent, and examples of the organic solvent include ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone and acetone; esters (carboxylic acid esters) such as ethyl acetate; ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and dioxane; cyclohexane , Aliphatic hydrocarbons such as n-hexane; aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene and xylene; alcohols such as 1-propanol and 2-propanol;

作為上述溶媒,例如,亦可未將黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的製造時所使用者從黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中去除,而直接用於黏著劑組合物(I-1),亦可將與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的製造時所使用者相同或不同種類的溶媒,在黏著劑組合物(I-1)的製造時額外添加。As the above-mentioned solvent, for example, it is possible to directly use the adhesive composition (I-1) without removing the user from the adhesive resin (I-1a) during the production of the adhesive resin (I-1a), The same or different type of solvent as the user used in the production of the adhesive resin (I-1a) may be additionally added during the production of the adhesive composition (I-1).

黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的溶媒,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The solvent contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-1)中,溶媒的含量並無特別限定,適當調節即可。In the adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the solvent is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted.

>黏著劑組合物(I-2)> 上述黏著劑組合物(I-2),如上述,含有在非能量線硬化性的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的側鏈導入不飽和基的能量線硬化性的黏著性樹脂(I-2a)。>Adhesive composition (I-2)> As described above, the adhesive composition (I-2) contains an energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-2a) having an unsaturated group introduced into the side chain of the non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a). ).

[黏著性樹脂(I-2a)] 上述黏著性樹脂(I-2a),例如,可藉由黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中的官能基與具有能量線聚合性不飽和基的含不飽和基的化合物反應而獲得。[Adhesive resin (I-2a)] The above-mentioned adhesive resin (I-2a) can be obtained, for example, by reacting a functional group in the adhesive resin (I-1a) with an unsaturated group-containing compound having an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group.

上述含不飽和基的化合物,為上述能量線聚合性不飽和基以外,進一步具有藉由與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中的官能基反應,而可與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)鍵結的基的化合物。 作為上述能量線聚合性不飽和基,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯醯基、乙烯基(次乙基)、丙烯基(2-丙烯基)等,以(甲基)丙烯醯基為佳。 作為可與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中的官能基鍵結的基,可列舉,例如,可與羥基或胺基鍵結的異氰酸酯基及環氧丙基,以及可與羧基或環氧基鍵結的羥基及胺基等。The above-mentioned unsaturated group-containing compound, in addition to the above energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group, further has a bond with the adhesive resin (I-1a) by reacting with the functional group in the adhesive resin (I-1a) Knot-based compounds. Examples of the energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group include, for example, (meth)acryloyl, vinyl (ethylene), propenyl (2-propenyl), etc., with (meth)acryloyl as the good. Examples of the group that can be bonded to the functional group in the adhesive resin (I-1a) include, for example, isocyanate groups and epoxy groups that can be bonded to hydroxyl groups or amine groups, and groups that can be bonded to carboxyl groups or epoxy groups Bonded hydroxyl and amine groups.

作為上述含不飽和基的化合物,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯醯基氧基乙基異氰酸酯、(甲基)丙烯醯基異氰酸酯、環氧丙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。Examples of the unsaturated group-containing compound include, for example, (meth)acryloyloxyethyl isocyanate, (meth)acryloyl isocyanate, and epoxypropyl (meth)acrylate.

黏著劑組合物(I-2)所含有的黏著性樹脂(I-2a),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The adhesive resin (I-2a) contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, the combination and ratio may be arbitrarily selected .

在黏著劑組合物(I-2)中,黏著性樹脂(I-2a)的含量,相對於黏著劑組合物(I-2)的總質量,以5~99質量%為佳,以10~95質量%為更佳,以10~90質量%為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-2), the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass relative to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-2), and 10 to 10 95% by mass is better, and 10 to 90% by mass is particularly good.

[交聯劑] 作為黏著性樹脂(I-2a),例如,使用與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中相同的具有來自含官能基的單體的構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合物時,黏著劑組合物(I-2)亦可進一步含有交聯劑。[Crosslinking agent] As the adhesive resin (I-2a), for example, when using the same acrylic polymer having the structural unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer as in the adhesive resin (I-1a), the adhesive composition (I -2) A crosslinking agent may be further contained.

作為黏著劑組合物(I-2)中的上述交聯劑,可列舉,與黏著劑組合物(I-1)中的交聯劑相同者。 黏著劑組合物(I-2)所含有的交聯劑,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。Examples of the cross-linking agent in the adhesive composition (I-2) include the same as the cross-linking agent in the adhesive composition (I-1). The crosslinking agent contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, the combination and ratio may be arbitrarily selected.

在上述黏著劑組合物(I-2)中,交聯劑的含量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)的含量100質量份,以0.01~50質量份為佳,以0.1~20質量份為更佳,以0.3~15質量份為特佳。In the above-mentioned adhesive composition (I-2), the content of the crosslinking agent is preferably 0.01 to 50 parts by mass, and 0.1 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a). For better, 0.3 to 15 parts by mass is particularly preferred.

[光聚合起始劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-2)亦可進一步含有光聚合起始劑。含有光聚合起始劑的黏著劑組合物(I-2),即使照射紫外線等能量比較低的能量線,仍可充分地進行硬化反應。[Photopolymerization initiator] The adhesive composition (I-2) may further contain a photopolymerization initiator. The adhesive composition (I-2) containing a photopolymerization initiator can sufficiently undergo a hardening reaction even when irradiated with relatively low energy rays such as ultraviolet rays.

作為黏著劑組合物(I-2)中的上述光聚合起始劑,可列舉,與黏著劑組合物(I-1)中的光聚合起始劑相同者。 黏著劑組合物(I-2)含有的光聚合起始劑,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。Examples of the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-2) include the same as the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-1). The photopolymerization initiator contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-2)中,光聚合起始劑的含量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)的含量100質量份,以0.01~20質量份為佳,以0.03~10質量份為更佳,以0.05~5質量份為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-2), the content of the photopolymerization initiator relative to the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) is 100 parts by mass, preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, and 0.03 to 10 parts by mass Servings are more preferred, with 0.05 to 5 parts by mass being particularly preferred.

[其他添加劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-2),在無損本發明效果的範圍內,亦可含有非上述任一成分的其他添加劑。 作為黏著劑組合物(I-2)中的上述其他添加劑,可列舉,與黏著劑組合物(I-1)中其他添加劑相同者。 黏著劑組合物(I-2)含有的其他添加劑,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-2) may contain other additives other than any of the above components as long as the effect of the present invention is not impaired. Examples of the other additives in the adhesive composition (I-2) include the same as the other additives in the adhesive composition (I-1). The other additives contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-2)中,其他添加劑的含量並無特別限定,對應其種類適當選擇即可。In the adhesive composition (I-2), the content of other additives is not particularly limited, and it may be appropriately selected according to the type.

[溶媒] 黏著劑組合物(I-2)亦可在與黏著劑組合物(I-1)時同樣的目的下,含有溶媒。 作為黏著劑組合物(I-2)中的上述溶媒,可列舉,與黏著劑組合物(I-1)中的溶媒相同者。 黏著劑組合物(I-2)含有的溶媒,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。 在黏著劑組合物(I-2)中,溶媒的含量並無特別限定,適當調節即可。[Solvent] The adhesive composition (I-2) may also contain a solvent for the same purpose as the adhesive composition (I-1). Examples of the solvent in the adhesive composition (I-2) include the same as the solvent in the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected. In the adhesive composition (I-2), the content of the solvent is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted.

>黏著劑組合物(I-3)> 上述黏著劑組合物(I-3),如上述,含有上述黏著性樹脂(I-2a)及能量線硬化性化合物。>Adhesive composition (I-3)> As mentioned above, the said adhesive composition (I-3) contains the said adhesive resin (I-2a) and an energy ray hardening compound.

在黏著劑組合物(I-3)中,黏著性樹脂(I-2a)的含量,相對於黏著劑組合物(I-3)的總質量,以5~99質量%為佳,以10~95質量%為更佳,以15~90質量%為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-3), the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass relative to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-3), and 10 to 10 95% by mass is better, and 15 to 90% by mass is particularly good.

[能量線硬化性化合物] 作為黏著劑組合物(I-3)所含有的上述能量線硬化性化合物,可列舉具有能量線聚合性不飽和基、可藉由能量線的照射而硬化的單體及寡聚體,可列舉,與黏著劑組合物(I-1)所含有的能量線硬化性化合物相同者。 黏著劑組合物(I-3)含有的上述能量線硬化性化合物,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。[Energy Ray Hardening Compound] Examples of the energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) include monomers and oligomers that have an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group and can be hardened by irradiation with energy ray, and examples include , The same as the energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-1). The energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在上述黏著劑組合物(I-3)中,上述能量線硬化性化合物的含量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)的含量100質量份,以0.01~300質量份為佳,以0.03~200質量份為更佳,以0.05~100質量份為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-3), the content of the energy ray-curable compound is preferably 0.01 to 300 parts by mass, and preferably 0.03 to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a). 200 parts by mass is better, and 0.05 to 100 parts by mass is particularly good.

[光聚合起始劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-3)亦可進一步含有光聚合起始劑。含有光聚合起始劑的黏著劑組合物(I-3),即使照射紫外線等能量比較低的能量線,仍可充分地進行硬化反應。[Photopolymerization initiator] The adhesive composition (I-3) may further contain a photopolymerization initiator. The adhesive composition (I-3) containing a photopolymerization initiator can sufficiently undergo a hardening reaction even when irradiated with relatively low energy rays such as ultraviolet rays.

作為黏著劑組合物(I-3)中的上述光聚合起始劑,可列舉,與黏著劑組合物(I-1)中的光聚合起始劑相同者。 黏著劑組合物(I-3)含有的光聚合起始劑,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be the same as the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-1). The photopolymerization initiator contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-3)中,光聚合起始劑的含量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)及上述能量線硬化性化合物的總含量100質量份,以0.01~20質量份為佳,以0.03~10質量份為更佳,以0.05~5質量份為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-3), the content of the photopolymerization initiator is 0.01 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the total content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) and the above energy ray-curable compound. Preferably, 0.03 to 10 parts by mass is more preferable, and 0.05 to 5 parts by mass is particularly preferable.

[其他添加劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-3),亦可在無損本發明效果的範圍內,含有非上述任一成分的其他添加劑。 作為上述其他添加劑,可列舉,與黏著劑組合物(I-1)中其他添加劑相同者。 黏著劑組合物(I-3)含有的其他添加劑,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-3) may contain other additives other than any of the above-mentioned components within the range that does not impair the effects of the present invention. Examples of the other additives mentioned above include the same as the other additives in the adhesive composition (I-1). The other additives contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-3)中,其他添加劑的含量並無特別限定,對應此等的種類適當選擇即可。In the adhesive composition (I-3), the content of other additives is not particularly limited, and it may be appropriately selected according to these types.

[溶媒] 黏著劑組合物(I-3)亦可在與黏著劑組合物(I-1)時相同的目的下,含有溶媒。 作為在黏著劑組合物(I-3)中的上述溶媒,可列舉,與黏著劑組合物(I-1)中的溶媒相同者。 黏著劑組合物(I-3)含有的溶媒,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。 在黏著劑組合物(I-3)中,溶媒的含量並無特別限定,適宜調節即可。[Solvent] The adhesive composition (I-3) may contain a solvent for the same purpose as the adhesive composition (I-1). Examples of the above-mentioned solvent in the adhesive composition (I-3) include the same as those in the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected. In the adhesive composition (I-3), the content of the solvent is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted.

>黏著劑組合物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組合物> 至此,雖然主要是說明關於黏著劑組合物(I-1)、黏著劑組合物(I-2)及黏著劑組合物(I-3),但已說明的此等的含有成分,即使是此等3種黏著劑組合物以外的全部黏著劑組合物(在本說明書中,稱為「黏著劑組合物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組合物」),亦可同樣地使用。>Adhesive composition other than adhesive composition (I-1) to (I-3)> So far, although the description is mainly on the adhesive composition (I-1), the adhesive composition (I-2), and the adhesive composition (I-3), the content of the components described above, even if it is All adhesive compositions other than the three types of adhesive compositions (referred to as "adhesive compositions other than adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3)" in this specification) can also be the same To use.

作為黏著劑組合物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組合物,可列舉除了能量線硬化性的黏著劑組合物以外的非能量線硬化性的黏著劑組合物。 作為非能量線硬化性的黏著劑組合物,可列舉,例如,含有丙烯酸系樹脂、胺甲酸乙酯系樹脂、橡膠系樹脂、矽酮系樹脂、環氧系樹脂、聚乙烯醚、聚碳酸酯、酯系樹脂等的非能量線硬化性的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的黏著劑組合物(I-4),以含有丙烯酸系樹脂者為佳。Examples of the adhesive composition other than the adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3) include non-energy ray-curable adhesive compositions other than the energy-ray-curable adhesive composition. Examples of the non-energy ray-curable adhesive composition include, for example, acrylic resins, urethane resins, rubber resins, silicone resins, epoxy resins, polyvinyl ethers, and polycarbonates. The adhesive composition (I-4) of a non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a), such as an acrylic resin, is preferably an acrylic resin.

黏著劑組合物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組合物,以含有1種或2種以上的交聯劑為佳,其含量可以與上述黏著劑組合物(I-1)等時相同。The adhesive composition other than the adhesive composition (I-1) to (I-3) preferably contains one or more crosslinking agents, and its content can be the same as that of the adhesive composition (I-1) ) The same at the same time.

>黏著劑組合物(I-4)> 作為較佳的黏著劑組合物(I-4),可列舉,例如,含有上述黏著性樹脂(I-1a)、交聯劑者。>Adhesive composition (I-4)> Examples of the preferable adhesive composition (I-4) include those containing the above-mentioned adhesive resin (I-1a) and crosslinking agent.

[黏著性樹脂(I-1a)] 作為黏著劑組合物(I-4)中的黏著性樹脂(I-1a),可列舉,與黏著劑組合物(I-1)中的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)相同者。 黏著劑組合物(I-4)含有的黏著性樹脂(I-1a),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。[Adhesive resin (I-1a)] Examples of the adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive composition (I-4) include the same ones as the adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive composition (I-1). The adhesive resin (I-1a) contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one type, or two or more types, and if there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-4)中,黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的含量,相對於黏著劑組合物(I-4)的總質量,以5~99質量%為佳,以10~95質量%為更佳,以15~90質量%為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-4), the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass relative to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-4), and 10 to 10 95% by mass is better, and 15 to 90% by mass is particularly good.

在黏著劑組合物(I-4)中,相對於溶媒以外的全部成分的總含量的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的含量的比率(亦即,黏著劑層的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的含量),以30~90質量%為佳,以40~85質量%為更佳,以50~80質量%為特佳。In the adhesive composition (I-4), the ratio of the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) relative to the total content of all components except the solvent (that is, the adhesive resin (I-1a of the adhesive layer ) Content, preferably 30 to 90% by mass, more preferably 40 to 85% by mass, and particularly preferably 50 to 80% by mass.

[交聯劑] 作為黏著性樹脂(I-1a),除了使用來自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的構成單元以外,進一步使用具有來自含官能基的單體的構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合物,黏著劑組合物(I-4)以進一步含有交聯劑者為佳。[Crosslinking agent] As the adhesive resin (I-1a), in addition to the structural unit derived from the alkyl (meth)acrylate, the above-mentioned acrylic polymer having the structural unit derived from the functional group-containing monomer is further used, and the adhesive composition (I-4) It is preferable to further contain a crosslinking agent.

作為黏著劑組合物(I-4)中的交聯劑,可列舉,與黏著劑組合物(I-1)中的交聯劑相同者。 黏著劑組合物(I-4)含有的交聯劑,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。Examples of the crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-4) include the same as the crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-1). The crosslinking agent contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在上述黏著劑組合物(I-4)中,交聯劑的含量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的含量100質量份,以0.01~50質量份為佳,以0.3~50質量份為更佳,以1~50質量份為進一步更佳,例如,可以是10~50質量份、15~50質量份及20~50質量份等的任一者。In the above adhesive composition (I-4), the content of the crosslinking agent is preferably 0.01 to 50 parts by mass, and 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a). For better results, 1 to 50 parts by mass is even more preferable. For example, any one of 10 to 50 parts by mass, 15 to 50 parts by mass, and 20 to 50 parts by mass may be used.

[其他添加劑] 黏著劑組合物(I-4),亦可在無損本發明效果的範圍內,含有非上述任一成分的其他添加劑。 作為上述其他添加劑,可列舉,與黏著劑組合物(I-1)中的其他添加劑相同者。 黏著劑組合物(I-4)含有的其他添加劑,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-4) may contain other additives other than any of the above-mentioned components within the range that does not impair the effects of the present invention. Examples of the other additives mentioned above include the same as the other additives in the adhesive composition (I-1). The other additives contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在黏著劑組合物(I-4)中,其他添加劑的含量並無特別限定,對應其種類適當選擇即可。In the adhesive composition (I-4), the content of other additives is not particularly limited, and it may be appropriately selected according to the type.

[溶媒] 黏著劑組合物(I-4)在與黏著劑組合物(I-1)時同樣的目的下,亦可含有溶媒。 作為在黏著劑組合物(I-4)中的上述溶媒,可列舉,與黏著劑組合物(I-1)中的溶媒相同者。 黏著劑組合物(I-4)含有的溶媒,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。 在黏著劑組合物(I-4)中,溶媒的含量並無特別限定,適當選擇即可。[Solvent] The adhesive composition (I-4) may contain a solvent for the same purpose as the adhesive composition (I-1). Examples of the above-mentioned solvent in the adhesive composition (I-4) include the same as those in the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one type, or two or more types, and if there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected. In the adhesive composition (I-4), the content of the solvent is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected.

在上述保護膜形成用複合片中,以黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性為佳。此乃因當黏著劑層為能量線硬化性時,藉由能量線的照射使保護膜形成用膜硬化時,無法抑制黏著劑層亦同時硬化。若黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜同時硬化,硬化後的保護膜形成用膜(亦即,保護膜)及黏著劑層,有時會以無法剝離程度的貼附在二者的界面。此時,變得難以將在背面包括硬化後的保護膜形成用膜、亦即保護膜的半導體晶片(附保護膜的半導體晶片),從包括硬化後的黏著劑層的支撐片剝離,導致無法正常地拾取附保護膜的半導體晶片。在上述支撐片中,藉由將黏著劑層設為非能量線硬化性,可確實迴避此類的不當,可更容易地拾取附保護膜的半導體晶片。In the above composite sheet for forming a protective film, the adhesive layer is preferably non-energy ray hardenable. This is because when the adhesive layer is energy ray curable, when the film for protective film formation is cured by irradiation of the energy ray, the adhesive layer cannot be simultaneously cured. If the adhesive layer and the protective film forming film are cured at the same time, the cured protective film forming film (ie, protective film) and the adhesive layer may be attached to the interface of the two to such an extent that they cannot be peeled off. At this time, it becomes difficult to peel off the semiconductor wafer including the protective film forming film after hardening, that is, the protective film (semiconductor wafer with protective film) from the support sheet including the adhesive layer after hardening, resulting in failure Pick up the semiconductor wafer with the protective film normally. In the above-mentioned support sheet, by making the adhesive layer non-energy ray hardenable, such improperness can be surely avoided, and the semiconductor wafer with a protective film can be picked up more easily.

在此,雖然已說明黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性時的效果,但即使與支撐片的保護膜形成用膜直接接觸的層為黏著劑層以外的層,若此層為非能量線硬化性,則達到同樣的效果。Here, although the effect when the adhesive layer is non-energy ray hardening has been described, even if the layer directly in contact with the protective film forming film of the support sheet is a layer other than the adhesive layer, if this layer is non-energy ray hardening Sex, the same effect is achieved.

>>黏著劑組合物的製造方法>> 黏著劑組合物(I-1)~(I-3)、黏著劑組合物(I-4)等黏著劑組合物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組合物,可藉由將上述黏著劑及視需要的上述黏著劑以外的成分等用以構成黏著劑組合物的各成分調配而獲得。 在各成分的調配時的添加順序並無特別限定,亦可同時添加2種以上的成分。 使用溶媒時,可將溶媒與溶媒以外的任一調配成分混合而預先稀釋此調配成分來使用,亦可不預先稀釋溶媒以外的任一調配成分而將溶媒與此等調配成分混合來使用。 調配時混合各成分的方法並無特別限定,使攪拌子或攪拌翼等旋轉而混合的方法;使用混合機的混合方法;施加超音波的混合方法等,從習知的方法適當選擇即可。 各成分的添加及混合時的溫度以及時間,只要各調配成分不會劣化則無特別限定,適當調節即可,但溫度以15~30℃為佳。>>Manufacturing method of adhesive composition>> Adhesive compositions other than adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3), adhesive compositions (I-4) and other adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3) can be borrowed It is obtained by mixing the components other than the above-mentioned adhesive and components other than the above-mentioned adhesive as needed to constitute the adhesive composition. The order of addition during the preparation of each component is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added simultaneously. When a solvent is used, the solvent may be mixed with any formulation component other than the solvent to dilute the formulation component in advance, or may be used by mixing the solvent with these formulation components without diluting any formulation component other than the solvent in advance. The method of mixing the components at the time of preparation is not particularly limited, and the method of rotating and mixing the stirrer, the stirring blade, etc.; the mixing method using a mixer; the mixing method using ultrasonic waves, etc., may be appropriately selected from known methods. The temperature and time at the time of addition and mixing of each component are not particularly limited as long as each formulated component does not deteriorate, and may be adjusted appropriately, but the temperature is preferably 15 to 30°C.

◎保護膜形成用膜 上述保護膜形成用膜,在藉由硬化或不使其硬化的原狀態,而成為保護膜。此保護膜為用以保護半導體晶圓或半導體晶片的背面(與電極形成面相反側的面)者。保護膜形成用膜為軟質,可易於貼附在貼附對象物。◎Protective film forming film The above-mentioned film for forming a protective film becomes a protective film in a state where it is cured or not cured. This protective film is for protecting the semiconductor wafer or the back surface (the surface opposite to the electrode formation surface) of the semiconductor wafer. The film for forming a protective film is soft and can be easily attached to the object to be attached.

上述保護膜形成用膜可為硬化性,亦可為非硬化性。 硬化性的保護膜形成用膜可以是熱硬化性及能量線硬化性的任一者,亦可以是具有熱硬化性及能量線硬化性兩者特性。 保護膜形成用膜可使用含有其構成材料的保護膜形成用組合物而形成。The film for forming a protective film may be curable or non-curable. The curable protective film forming film may be either thermosetting or energy ray-curable, or may have both thermosetting and energy-ray-curable properties. The film for forming a protective film can be formed using a composition for forming a protective film containing its constituent material.

在本說明書中,「非硬化性」是指即使藉由加熱、能量線的照射等任何手段,卻不硬化的性質。 在本發明中,保護膜形成用膜即使在硬化後,只要仍維持支撐片及保護膜形成用膜的硬化物(換言之,支撐片及保護膜)的積層構造,將此積層體稱為「保護膜形成用複合片」。In this specification, "non-hardening" refers to the property that it does not harden even by any means such as heating or irradiation of energy rays. In the present invention, even after the film for protective film formation is cured, as long as the laminated structure of the cured product of the support sheet and the film for protective film formation (in other words, the support sheet and protective film) is maintained, this laminate is called "protection" Composite sheet for film formation."

保護膜形成用膜,不論其種類,可以是由1層(單層)所構成,亦可以由2層以上的複數層所構成。當保護膜形成用膜為由複數層所構成時,此等複數層可以彼此相同亦可不同。The film for forming a protective film may be composed of one layer (single layer) or plural layers of two or more layers regardless of the type. When the film for forming a protective film is composed of plural layers, these plural layers may be the same as or different from each other.

於此,再度一邊參照圖4,一邊進一步詳細說明關於黏著劑層及保護膜形成用膜。 如先前說明,基材11的第一面11a為凹凸面。但是,在黏著劑層12中,藉由其S值為1.5μm以上,此凹凸面的影響受到抑制,在黏著劑層12的第一面12a上,凹凸度變小。因此,黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用膜13間的積層性變得良好。例如,黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用膜13之間,即使存在有黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用膜13未貼合的區域(非貼合區域)92,其數量在整個保護膜形成用複合片1A中的保護膜形成用膜13的形成區域全區,在3處以下,變得極少。上述非貼合區域92,例如,藉由從基材11側觀察保護膜形成用複合片1A,可容易地確認。Here, referring to FIG. 4 again, the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film will be described in further detail. As previously explained, the first surface 11a of the base material 11 is a concave-convex surface. However, in the adhesive layer 12, the S value of 1.5 μm or more suppresses the influence of the uneven surface, and the unevenness on the first surface 12 a of the adhesive layer 12 decreases. Therefore, the lamination property between the adhesive layer 12 and the protective film forming film 13 becomes good. For example, between the adhesive layer 12 and the film 13 for forming a protective film, even if there are areas (non-bonding areas) 92 where the adhesive layer 12 and the film 13 for forming a protective film are not bonded, the number is formed in the entire protective film In the composite sheet 1A, the entire formation area of the protective film forming film 13 is less than 3 places. The non-lamination region 92 can be easily confirmed by viewing the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film from the base 11 side, for example.

再者,保護膜形成用複合片1A即使有此類非貼合區域92,在保護膜形成用複合片1A的厚度方向上,非貼合區域92的大小(層間距離),例如,0.5μm以下的保護膜形成用複合片1A,黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用膜13間的積層性變得更良好。在此,「非貼合區域92的大小(層間距離)」,是指「在保護膜形成用複合片1A的厚度方向上,黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用膜13之間的層間距離」。Furthermore, even if the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation has such a non-laminated region 92, the size (interlayer distance) of the non-laminated region 92 in the thickness direction of the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation is, for example, 0.5 μm or less In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, the lamination property between the adhesive layer 12 and the film 13 for forming a protective film becomes better. Here, "the size of the non-lamination region 92 (interlayer distance)" means "the interlayer distance between the adhesive layer 12 and the protective film forming film 13 in the thickness direction of the protective film forming composite sheet 1A" .

非貼合區域92的大小(上述層間距離),與上述非貼合區域91的上述層間距離(大小)相同,以0.5μm以下為佳,例如,可以是0.4μm以下、0.3μm以下、0.2μm以下及0.1μm以下的任一者。The size (the interlayer distance) of the non-laminated area 92 is the same as the interlayer distance (size) of the non-laminated area 91, and is preferably 0.5 μm or less, for example, 0.4 μm or less, 0.3 μm or less, 0.2 μm Any of the following and 0.1 μm or less.

非貼合區域92的大小(層間距離),例如,除了成為對象的2層的組合不同的差異點以外,可藉由與上述非貼合區域91的大小(層間距離)的情況相同方法求得。The size (interlayer distance) of the non-adhering region 92 can be obtained by the same method as the case of the size (interlayer distance) of the non-adhering region 91, except for the difference between the combinations of the two layers to be targeted, for example. .

在保護膜形成用複合片1A中,有時非貼合區域92完全不存在。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, the non-lamination area 92 may not exist at all.

另一方面,如上述,在黏著劑層12的第一面12a的凹凸度變小。因此,雖然保護膜形成用膜13的厚度Tp 非定值,依保護膜形成用膜13(黏著劑層12)的部位而變動,但其變動幅度極小。On the other hand, as described above, the unevenness on the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12 becomes small. Therefore, although the thickness T p of the protective film forming film 13 is not constant and varies depending on the location of the protective film forming film 13 (adhesive layer 12 ), the variation range is extremely small.

再者,如上述,由於在黏著劑層12的第一面12a的凹凸度變小,保護膜形成用膜13的黏著劑層12側的面(第二面)13b變得平滑或凹凸度變小。因此,不會破壞保護膜形成用膜13的外觀。 然後,即使在由保護膜形成用膜13形成的保護膜,其黏著劑層12側的面(第二面)變得平滑或凹凸度變小,不會破壞保護膜的外觀。 如此一來,在保護膜形成用複合片1A中,保護膜形成用膜13及保護膜皆可成為設計性佳者。Furthermore, as described above, since the unevenness on the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12 becomes small, the surface (second surface) 13b of the protective film forming film 13 on the adhesive layer 12 side becomes smooth or the unevenness becomes small. Therefore, the appearance of the protective film forming film 13 is not damaged. Then, even in the protective film formed by the protective film forming film 13, the surface (second surface) on the side of the adhesive layer 12 becomes smooth or the unevenness becomes small, and the appearance of the protective film is not damaged. In this way, in the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, both the film 13 for forming a protective film and the protective film can become those with good design.

在保護膜形成用膜13的第二面13b上,凸部的最高部位與凹部的最深部位之間的最大高低差,以2μm以下為佳,例如,可以是1.5μm以下及1μm以下的任一者。此類保護膜形成用膜13及保護膜,設計性特別佳。On the second surface 13b of the film 13 for protective film formation, the maximum height difference between the highest part of the convex part and the deepest part of the concave part is preferably 2 μm or less, for example, may be any of 1.5 μm or less and 1 μm or less By. Such a film 13 for forming a protective film and a protective film are particularly excellent in design.

在保護膜形成用膜13的第二面13b的上述最大高低差,例如,藉由先前說明的方法,在保護膜形成用複合片的試片或保護膜形成用複合片本身,形成剖面,使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察此剖面而求得。The above-mentioned maximum height difference on the second surface 13b of the protective film forming film 13 is formed, for example, by forming a cross section on the test piece of the protective film forming composite sheet or the protective film forming composite sheet itself by the method described previously. Scanning electron microscope (SEM) was observed by observing this section.

在此,雖然舉保護膜形成用複合片1A為例,說明關於黏著劑層及保護膜形成用膜,但即使是保護膜形成用複合片1B、保護膜形成用複合片1C等其他實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片的情況,黏著劑保護膜形成用膜亦相同。Here, although the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1A is taken as an example to describe the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film, the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1B, the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1C and other embodiments In the case of a composite sheet for forming a protective film, the film for forming an adhesive protective film is also the same.

在本發明的保護膜形成用複合片中,保護膜形成用膜的厚度(例如Tp ),以1~100μm為佳,以3~75μm為更佳,以5~50μm為特佳。藉由保護膜形成用膜的厚度為上述下限值以上,可形成保護能力更高的保護膜。藉由保護膜形成用膜的厚度為上述上限值以下,可抑制成為過大的厚度。In the composite sheet for forming a protective film of the present invention, the thickness (for example, T p ) of the film for forming a protective film is preferably 1 to 100 μm, more preferably 3 to 75 μm, and particularly preferably 5 to 50 μm. When the thickness of the film for forming a protective film is equal to or greater than the above lower limit value, a protective film with higher protective ability can be formed. When the thickness of the protective film forming film is equal to or less than the above upper limit value, it can be suppressed from becoming excessively thick.

當保護膜形成用膜的厚度依保護膜形成用膜的部位而變動時,保護膜形成用膜的厚度的最小值可以是上述下限值以上,保護膜形成用膜的厚度的最大值亦可以是上述上限值以下。When the thickness of the protective film forming film varies depending on the position of the protective film forming film, the minimum value of the thickness of the protective film forming film may be equal to or greater than the above lower limit, and the maximum value of the thickness of the protective film forming film may also be Is below the upper limit.

另外,「保護膜形成用膜的厚度」是指保護膜形成用膜全體的厚度,例如,由複數層所構成的保護膜形成用膜的厚度,是指構成保護膜形成用膜的全部的層的合計厚度。In addition, the "thickness of the protective film forming film" refers to the thickness of the entire protective film forming film, for example, the thickness of the protective film forming film composed of a plurality of layers refers to all layers constituting the protective film forming film The total thickness of.

保護膜形成用膜的厚度,例如,可藉由使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察保護膜形成用膜的側面或剖面而測定。 保護膜形成用膜的剖面,例如,可藉由與在上述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的試片中的剖面時同樣的方法而形成。The thickness of the film for protective film formation can be measured, for example, by observing the side surface or cross section of the film for protective film formation using a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The cross section of the film for forming a protective film can be formed, for example, by the same method as the cross section in the test piece of the above-mentioned support sheet and the composite sheet for forming a protective film.

例如,藉由先前說明的方法,從保護膜形成用複合片的複數處(例如5處)切出試片,在此試片中,求得保護膜形成用膜的厚度的最小值及最大值,進一步由此等值,求得此等的最小值的平均值及最大值的平均值時,上述最小值的平均值可以是上述保護膜形成用膜的厚度的下限值以上,上述最大值的平均值亦可以是上述保護膜形成用膜的厚度的上限值以下。For example, by the method described previously, a test piece is cut out from a plurality of places (for example, 5 places) of the composite film for forming a protective film, and in this test piece, the minimum and maximum thickness of the film for forming the protective film is obtained , From these equivalent values, when the average value of the minimum value and the average value of the maximum value are obtained, the average value of the minimum value may be equal to or greater than the lower limit value of the thickness of the protective film forming film, The average value of may be equal to or less than the upper limit of the thickness of the protective film forming film.

保護膜形成用膜可以使用含有其構成材料的保護膜形成用組合物而形成。例如,可藉由在保護膜形成用膜的形成對象面,塗佈保護膜形成用組合物,視需要使其乾燥,而在目標部位形成保護膜形成用膜。保護膜形成用組合物中的常溫未氣化成分彼此的含量的比率,通常與保護膜形成用膜的上述成分彼此的含量的比率相同。The film for forming a protective film can be formed using a composition for forming a protective film containing its constituent material. For example, the protective film formation composition may be formed on a target portion by applying a protective film formation composition on the surface to be formed of the protective film formation film and drying it if necessary. The ratio of the contents of the non-vaporized components at normal temperature in the composition for forming a protective film is generally the same as the ratio of the contents of the aforementioned components in the film for forming a protective film.

保護形成用組合物的塗佈可藉由習知的方法進行,例如,可列舉使用空氣刀塗佈機、刮刀塗佈機、桿塗佈機、凹版印刷塗佈機、軋輥塗佈機、輥刀塗佈機、簾幕塗佈機、模具塗佈機、刀式塗佈機、網版塗佈機、麥勒棒塗機、吻合式塗佈機等各種塗佈機的方法。The application of the protective forming composition can be performed by a conventional method, and examples include air knife coaters, blade coaters, rod coaters, gravure coaters, roll coaters, and rolls. Methods of various coaters such as knife coaters, curtain coaters, die coaters, knife coaters, screen coaters, Mailer bar coaters, and kiss coaters.

保護膜形成用組合物的乾燥條件並無特別限定,但保護膜形成用組合物含有下述溶媒時,以加熱乾燥為佳。然後,含有溶媒的保護膜形成用組合物,例如,以在70~130℃、10秒~5分鐘的條件下使其乾燥為佳。但是,當保護膜形成用組合物為熱硬化性時,以所形成的保護膜形成用膜不會熱硬化的方式,使保護膜形成用組合物乾燥為佳。The drying conditions of the composition for forming a protective film are not particularly limited, but when the composition for forming a protective film contains the following solvent, it is preferably dried by heating. Then, the composition for forming a protective film containing a solvent is preferably dried at 70 to 130° C. for 10 seconds to 5 minutes, for example. However, when the composition for forming a protective film is thermosetting, it is preferable to dry the composition for forming a protective film so that the formed film for forming a protective film will not be thermally cured.

以下,關於保護膜形成用膜及保護膜形成用組合物,對其種類逐一詳細說明。Hereinafter, the film for protective film formation and the composition for protective film formation are explained in detail one by one.

○熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜 作為較佳的熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜,可列舉,例如,含有聚合物成分(A)及熱硬化性成分(B)者。 聚合物成分(A),視為聚合性化合物經聚合反應所形成的成分。 熱硬化性成分(B)為以熱作為反應的觸發器,經硬化(聚合)反應可得的成分。另外,本發明中,聚合反應包含聚縮合反應。○The film for forming thermosetting protective film Preferred films for forming a thermosetting protective film include, for example, those containing a polymer component (A) and a thermosetting component (B). The polymer component (A) is regarded as a component formed by polymerization of a polymerizable compound. The thermosetting component (B) is a component that can be obtained through a hardening (polymerization) reaction using heat as a trigger for the reaction. In addition, in the present invention, the polymerization reaction includes a polycondensation reaction.

將熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜貼附在半導體晶圓的背面之後,使其熱硬化時的硬化條件,只要是硬化物達到充分發揮其功能的程度的硬化度則無特別限定,對應熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的種類,適當選擇即可。 例如,熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的熱硬化時的加熱溫度,以100~200℃為佳,以110~180℃為更佳,以120~170℃為特佳。然後,上述硬化時的加熱時間,以0.5~5小時為佳,以0.5~3小時為更佳,以1~2小時為特佳。After the film for forming a thermosetting protective film is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer, the curing conditions at the time of thermal curing are not particularly limited as long as the cured product has a degree of curing that fully exerts its function, and corresponds to thermal curing The type of film for forming a protective film may be appropriately selected. For example, the heating temperature during thermosetting of the thermosetting protective film forming film is preferably 100 to 200°C, more preferably 110 to 180°C, and particularly preferably 120 to 170°C. Then, the heating time during the hardening is preferably 0.5 to 5 hours, more preferably 0.5 to 3 hours, and particularly preferably 1 to 2 hours.

>熱硬化性保護膜形成用組合物(III-1)> 作為較佳的熱硬化性保護膜形成用組合物,可列舉,例如,含有聚合物成分(A)及熱硬化性成分(B)的熱硬化性保護膜形成用組合物(III-1)(在本說明書中,簡稱為「組合物(III-1)」)等。>Composition for forming thermosetting protective film (III-1)> Examples of a preferred composition for forming a thermosetting protective film include, for example, a composition for forming a thermosetting protective film (III-1) containing a polymer component (A) and a thermosetting component (B) ( In this specification, it is abbreviated as "composition (III-1)") and the like.

[聚合物成分(A)] 聚合物成分(A)為在熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜中,用以賦予造膜性、可撓性等的成分。 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜所含有的聚合物成分(A),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。[Polymer component (A)] The polymer component (A) is a component for imparting film-forming properties, flexibility, etc. in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film. The polymer component (A) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, you can choose this arbitrarily And other combinations and ratios.

作為聚合物成分(A),可列舉,例如,丙烯酸系樹脂、聚酯、胺甲酸乙酯系樹脂、丙烯酸胺甲酸乙酯樹脂、矽酮系樹脂、橡膠系樹脂、苯氧基樹脂、熱硬化性聚醯亞胺等,以丙烯酸系樹脂為佳。Examples of the polymer component (A) include acrylic resins, polyesters, urethane resins, urethane acrylate resins, silicone resins, rubber resins, phenoxy resins, and thermosetting resins. Acrylic resins are preferred, such as polyimide.

作為聚合物成分(A)中的上述丙烯酸系樹脂,可列舉習知的丙烯酸聚合物。 丙烯酸系樹脂的重量平均分子量(Mw),以10000~2000000為佳,以100000~1500000為更佳。藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的重量平均分子量為上述下限值以上,提升熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的形狀安定性(保存時的隨時間安定性)。此外,藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的重量平均分子量為上述上限值以下,熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜變得易於服貼被附著體的凹凸面,被附著體與熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜之間孔洞等的發生更受到抑制。Examples of the acrylic resin in the polymer component (A) include conventional acrylic polymers. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the acrylic resin is preferably 10,000 to 2,000,000, and more preferably 100,000 to 1,500,000. When the weight average molecular weight of the acrylic resin is at least the above lower limit value, the shape stability of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film (time stability during storage) is improved. In addition, when the weight average molecular weight of the acrylic resin is equal to or less than the above upper limit, the film for forming a thermosetting protective film becomes easy to adhere to the uneven surface of the adherend, and the film for forming the adherend and the thermosetting protective film The occurrence of holes and the like is more suppressed.

在本說明書中,重量平均分子量,若無特別說明,為藉由凝膠滲透層析術(GPC)法所測定的聚苯乙烯換算值。In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the weight average molecular weight is a polystyrene conversion value measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) method.

丙烯酸系樹脂的玻璃轉換溫度(Tg),以-60~70℃為佳,以-30~50℃為更佳。藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的Tg為上述下限值以上,例如,保護膜形成用膜的硬化物(亦即,保護膜)與支撐片間的接著力受到抑制,適度提升支撐片的剝離性。此外,藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的Tg為上述上限值以下,提升熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜及保護膜的與被附著體的接著力。 另外,不限於丙烯酸系樹,本說明書中的樹脂的Tg,例如,使用示差掃描熱卡計(DSC),升溫速度或降溫速度設為10℃/min,在-70℃至150℃之間使測定對象物的溫度變化,藉由反曲點而可求得。The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the acrylic resin is preferably -60 to 70°C, and more preferably -30 to 50°C. When the Tg of the acrylic resin is equal to or greater than the above lower limit, for example, the adhesive force between the cured product of the protective film formation film (that is, the protective film) and the support sheet is suppressed, and the peelability of the support sheet is appropriately improved. In addition, when the Tg of the acrylic resin is equal to or lower than the above upper limit value, the adhesion between the film for forming a thermosetting protective film and the protective film and the adherend is improved. In addition, it is not limited to acrylic trees. The Tg of the resin in this specification is, for example, using a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC), and the heating rate or cooling rate is set to 10°C/min, and the temperature is between -70°C and 150°C. The temperature change of the object to be measured can be obtained from the inflection point.

作為丙烯酸系樹脂,可列舉,例如,1種或2種以上的(甲基)丙烯酸酯的聚合物;2種以上的選自(甲基)丙烯酸、伊康酸、乙酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈、苯乙烯及N-羥甲基丙烯醯胺等的單體的共聚合物等。Examples of the acrylic resin include, for example, one or more types of (meth)acrylate polymers; two or more types selected from (meth)acrylic acid, itaconic acid, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, Copolymers of monomers such as styrene and N-methylolacrylamide, etc.

作為構成丙烯酸系樹脂的上述(甲基)丙烯酸酯,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二酯((甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四酯((甲基)丙烯酸肉豆蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六酯((甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八酯((甲基)丙烯酸硬脂醯酯)等的構成烷基酯的烷基為碳數為1~18的鏈狀構造的(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸異莰酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊基酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸環烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸苄酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸芳烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯基酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸環烯基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸二環烯基氧基乙基酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸環烯基氧基烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸醯亞胺; (甲基)丙烯酸環氧丙酯等的含環氧丙基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯; (甲基)丙烯酸羥甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸4-羥丁酯等的含羥基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯; (甲基)丙烯酸N-甲基胺基乙酯等的含取代胺基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。在此,所謂「取代胺基」,是指胺基的1個或2個的氫原子被氫原子以外的基取代而成的基。Examples of the (meth)acrylate constituting the acrylic resin include, for example, methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth)acrylic acid. Propyl ester, n-butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, secondary butyl (meth)acrylate, tertiary butyl (meth)acrylate, pentyl (meth)acrylate, ( Hexyl meth)acrylate, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid N-nonyl ester, isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, dodecyl (meth)acrylate (lauryl (meth)acrylate), (A Base) Tridecyl acrylate, tetradecyl (meth) acrylate (myristyl (meth) acrylate), pentadecyl (meth) acrylate, hexadecyl (meth) acrylate ((meth) acrylate palm Ester), heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, octadecyl (meth)acrylate (stearyl (meth)acrylate), etc. The alkyl group constituting the alkyl ester is a chain having a carbon number of 1 to 18 Structured alkyl (meth)acrylate; (Meth)acrylic acid cyclopentyl (meth)acrylate, isocamphenyl (meth)acrylate, dicyclopentyl (meth)acrylate; Aralkyl (meth)acrylates such as benzyl (meth)acrylate; Cycloalkenyl (meth)acrylate such as dicyclopentenyl (meth)acrylate; (Meth)acrylic acid cycloalkenyloxyalkyl esters such as (meth)acrylic acid dicycloalkenyloxyethyl esters; (Meth)acrylic acid imide; (Meth)acrylates containing glycidyl groups such as glycidyl (meth)acrylate; Hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxy (meth)acrylate Hydroxyl-containing (meth)acrylates such as butyl ester, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate; Substituted amine group-containing (meth)acrylates such as N-methylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate. Here, the "substituted amine group" refers to a group in which one or two hydrogen atoms of the amine group are substituted with groups other than hydrogen atoms.

丙烯酸系樹脂亦可例如,由上述(甲基)丙烯酸酯以外,選自(甲基)丙烯酸、伊康酸、乙酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈、苯乙烯及N-羥甲基丙烯醯胺等的1種或2種以上的單體經由共聚合而成者。The acrylic resin may, for example, be selected from (meth)acrylic acid, itaconic acid, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, styrene, N-methylolacrylamide, etc. other than the (meth)acrylate One or two or more monomers are copolymerized.

構成丙烯酸系樹脂的單體,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The monomer constituting the acrylic resin may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

丙烯酸系樹脂亦可具有乙烯基、(甲基)丙烯醯基、胺基、羥基、羧基、異氰酸酯基等的可與其他化合物鍵結的官能基。丙烯酸系樹脂的上述官能基可透過下述交聯劑(F)與其他化合物鍵結,亦可不透過交聯劑(F)與其他化合物直接鍵結。由於丙烯酸系樹脂藉由上述官能基與其他化合物鍵結,使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得的封裝體的可靠度有提升的傾向。The acrylic resin may also have functional groups that can bond with other compounds such as vinyl groups, (meth)acryloyl groups, amine groups, hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, and isocyanate groups. The above-mentioned functional group of the acrylic resin may be bonded to other compounds through the following crosslinking agent (F), or may be directly bonded to other compounds without the crosslinking agent (F). Since the acrylic resin is bonded to other compounds through the above functional groups, the reliability of the package obtained by using the composite film for forming a protective film tends to be improved.

在本發明中,作為聚合物成分(A),可不使用丙烯酸系樹脂,而單獨地使用丙烯酸系樹脂以外的熱可塑性樹脂(以下,簡稱「熱可塑性樹脂」),亦可與丙烯酸系樹脂並用。藉由使用上述熱可塑性樹脂,提升保護膜的從支撐片的剝離性等,熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜變得易於服貼被附著體的凹凸面,被附著體與熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜之間孔洞等的發生更受到抑制。In the present invention, as the polymer component (A), instead of using an acrylic resin, a thermoplastic resin other than the acrylic resin (hereinafter, simply referred to as "thermoplastic resin") may be used alone, or may be used together with the acrylic resin. By using the above-mentioned thermoplastic resin, the peelability of the protective film from the support sheet is improved, the film for forming a thermosetting protective film becomes easy to adhere to the uneven surface of the adherend, and the adherend is formed with the thermosetting protective film The occurrence of holes and the like between the membranes is more suppressed.

上述熱可塑性樹脂的重量平均分子量,以1000~100000為佳,以3000~80000為更佳。The weight average molecular weight of the thermoplastic resin is preferably 1,000 to 100,000, and more preferably 3,000 to 80,000.

上述熱可塑性樹脂的玻璃轉換溫度(Tg),以-30~150℃為佳,以-20~120℃為更佳。The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the thermoplastic resin is preferably -30 to 150°C, and more preferably -20 to 120°C.

作為上述熱可塑性樹脂,可列舉,例如,聚酯、聚氨酯、苯氧基樹脂、聚丁烯、聚丁二烯、聚苯乙烯等。Examples of the thermoplastic resin include polyester, polyurethane, phenoxy resin, polybutene, polybutadiene, and polystyrene.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜所含有的上述熱可塑性樹脂,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The thermoplastic resin contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations may be arbitrarily selected And ratio.

在組合物(III-1)中,相對於溶媒以外的全部成分的總含量的聚合物成分(A)的含量的比率(亦即,熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的聚合物成分(A)的含量),不論聚合物成分(A)的種類為何,以5~85質量%為佳,以5~75質量%為更佳,例如,可以是5~65質量%、5~50質量%及10~35質量%等的任一者。In the composition (III-1), the content ratio of the polymer component (A) to the total content of all components except the solvent (that is, the polymer component (A) of the film for thermosetting protective film formation) Content), regardless of the type of polymer component (A), preferably 5 to 85% by mass, more preferably 5 to 75% by mass, for example, 5 to 65% by mass, 5 to 50% by mass and Any of 10 to 35% by mass.

聚合物成分(A)也有可對應熱硬化性成分(B)的情況。在本發明中,組合物(III-1)含有對應此類聚合物成分(A)及熱硬化性成分(B)兩者的成分時,視為組合物(III-1)含有聚合物成分(A)及熱硬化性成分(B)。The polymer component (A) may be compatible with the thermosetting component (B). In the present invention, when the composition (III-1) contains components corresponding to both the polymer component (A) and the thermosetting component (B), it is considered that the composition (III-1) contains the polymer component ( A) and thermosetting component (B).

[熱硬化性成分(B)] 熱硬化性成分(B)是用以使熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜硬化的成分。 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜所含有的熱硬化性成分(B),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。[Thermosetting component (B)] The thermosetting component (B) is a component for curing the film for forming a thermosetting protective film. The composition (III-1) and the thermosetting component (B) contained in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if two or more kinds, they may be arbitrarily selected These combinations and ratios.

作為熱硬化性成分(B),可列舉,例如,環氧系熱硬化性樹脂、熱硬化性聚醯亞胺、聚氨酯、不飽和聚酯、矽酮樹脂等,以環氧系熱硬化性樹脂為佳。Examples of the thermosetting component (B) include, for example, epoxy-based thermosetting resin, thermosetting polyimide, polyurethane, unsaturated polyester, silicone resin, etc., epoxy-based thermosetting resin Better.

(環氧系熱硬化性樹脂) 環氧系熱硬化性樹脂是由環氧樹脂(B1)及熱硬化劑(B2)所構成。 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜所含有的環氧系熱硬化性樹脂,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。(Epoxy thermosetting resin) The epoxy-based thermosetting resin is composed of an epoxy resin (B1) and a thermosetting agent (B2). The epoxy-based thermosetting resin contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds, and if two or more kinds, it may be arbitrarily selected These combinations and ratios.

環氧樹脂(B1) 作為環氧樹脂(B1),可列舉習知者,例如,多官能系環氧樹脂、聯苯化合物、雙酚A二環氧丙醚及其氫化物、鄰甲酚酚醛清漆環氧樹脂、二環戊二烯型環氧樹脂、聯苯型環氧樹脂、雙酚A型環氧樹脂、雙酚F型環氧樹脂、伸苯基骨架型樹脂等、2官能以上的環氧化合物。Epoxy resin (B1) Examples of the epoxy resin (B1) include conventional ones, for example, polyfunctional epoxy resins, biphenyl compounds, bisphenol A diglycidyl ether and its hydrogenated products, o-cresol novolac epoxy resins, Cyclopentadiene type epoxy resin, biphenyl type epoxy resin, bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenylene skeleton type resin, etc., more than two functional epoxy compounds.

作為環氧樹脂(B1),亦可使用具有不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂。具有不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂比起不具有不飽和烴基的樹脂,與丙烯酸系樹脂的相溶性較高。因此,藉由使用具有不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂,使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得的附保護膜的半導體晶片的可靠度提升。As the epoxy resin (B1), an epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group can also be used. Epoxy resins having unsaturated hydrocarbon groups have higher compatibility with acrylic resins than resins having no unsaturated hydrocarbon groups. Therefore, by using an epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, the reliability of the semiconductor wafer with a protective film obtained by using the composite film for forming a protective film is improved.

作為具有不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂,可列舉,例如,多官能系環氧樹脂的環氧基的一部分部被轉換為具有不飽和烴基的基而成的化合物。此類化合物,例如,可藉由(甲基)丙烯酸或其衍生物對環氧基進行加成反應而獲得。 此外,作為具有不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂,可列舉,例如,在構成環氧樹脂的芳香環等直接鍵結具有不飽和烴基的基的化合物等。 不飽和烴基為具有聚合性的不飽和基,作為其具體例,可列舉次乙基(乙烯基)、2-丙烯基(丙烯基)、(甲基)丙烯醯基、(甲基)丙烯醯胺基等,以丙烯醯基為佳。As the epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, for example, a compound in which a part of the epoxy group of the multifunctional epoxy resin is converted into a group having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group. Such compounds can be obtained, for example, by addition reaction of (meth)acrylic acid or its derivatives to epoxy groups. In addition, examples of the epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group include, for example, compounds in which a group having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group is directly bonded to an aromatic ring constituting the epoxy resin. The unsaturated hydrocarbon group is a polymerizable unsaturated group, and specific examples thereof include methine (vinyl), 2-propenyl (propenyl), (meth)acryloyl, and (meth)acryloyl. Amino groups, etc. are preferably acryl.

環氧樹脂(B1)的數量平均分子量,雖然無特別限定,但從熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的硬化性以及硬化後的保護膜的強度及耐熱性的觀點而言,以300~30000為佳,以300~10000為更佳,以300~3000為特佳。The number average molecular weight of the epoxy resin (B1) is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of the curability of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film and the strength and heat resistance of the protective film after curing, it is 300 to 30,000 Good, 300~10000 is better, 300~3000 is especially good.

在本說明書中,數量平均分子量,若無特別說明,為藉由凝膠滲透層析術(GPC)法所測定的聚苯乙烯換算值。In this specification, the number average molecular weight, unless otherwise specified, is a polystyrene conversion value measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) method.

環氧樹脂(B1)的環氧當量,以100~1000g/eq為佳,以150~950g/eq為更佳。The epoxy equivalent of the epoxy resin (B1) is preferably 100 to 1000 g/eq, and more preferably 150 to 950 g/eq.

環氧樹脂(B1)可單獨使用1種,亦可並用2種以上,若並用2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。One type of epoxy resin (B1) may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination. If two or more types are used in combination, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

•熱硬化劑(B2) 熱硬化劑(B2)具有作為對於環氧樹脂(B1)的硬化劑的功能。 作為熱硬化劑(B2),可列舉,例如,在1分子中具有2個以上可與環氧基反應的官能基的化合物。作為上述官能基,可列舉,例如,酚性羥基、醇性羥基、胺基、羧基、酸基經酸酐化的基等,以酚性羥基、胺基或酸基經酸酐化的基為佳,以酚性羥基或胺基為更佳。• Heat hardener (B2) The thermal hardener (B2) has a function as a hardener for the epoxy resin (B1). Examples of the thermosetting agent (B2) include compounds having two or more functional groups that can react with epoxy groups in one molecule. Examples of the above-mentioned functional groups include phenolic hydroxyl groups, alcoholic hydroxyl groups, amine groups, carboxyl groups, and acidified groups such as acid groups, and phenolic hydroxyl groups, amine groups or acid groups are preferably acidified groups. Phenolic hydroxyl or amine groups are more preferred.

熱硬化劑(B2)當中,作為具有酚性羥基的酚系硬化劑,可列舉,例如,多官能酚樹脂、聯苯酚、酚醛清漆型酚樹脂、二環戊二烯型酚樹脂、芳烷基型酚樹脂等。 熱硬化劑(B2)當中,作為具有胺基的胺系硬化劑,可列舉,例如,二氰二胺等。Among the thermosetting agents (B2), examples of the phenolic curing agent having a phenolic hydroxyl group include, for example, polyfunctional phenol resin, biphenol, novolac type phenol resin, dicyclopentadiene type phenol resin, and aralkyl group. Type phenol resin, etc. Among the thermal hardeners (B2), examples of the amine-based hardener having an amine group include dicyandiamine and the like.

熱硬化劑(B2)亦可具有不飽和烴基。 作為具有不飽和烴基的熱硬化劑(B2),可列舉,例如,酚樹脂的羥基的一部分被具有不飽和烴基的基取代而成的化合物、在酚樹脂的芳香環直接鍵結具有不飽和烴基的基而成的化合物等。 熱硬化劑(B2)中的上述不飽和烴基,與上述具有不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂中的不飽和烴基為相同者。The thermal hardener (B2) may have an unsaturated hydrocarbon group. Examples of the thermosetting agent (B2) having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group include, for example, a compound in which a part of the hydroxyl group of a phenol resin is substituted with a group having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, and an unsaturated hydrocarbon group directly bonded to the aromatic ring of the phenol resin Based on the compound. The unsaturated hydrocarbon group in the thermosetting agent (B2) is the same as the unsaturated hydrocarbon group in the epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group.

使用酚系硬化劑作為熱硬化劑(B2)時,就提升保護膜的從支撐片的剝離性的觀點而言,熱硬化劑(B2),以軟化點或玻璃轉換溫度高者為佳。When a phenolic hardener is used as the thermal hardener (B2), the thermal hardener (B2) is preferably one having a high softening point or a high glass transition temperature from the viewpoint of improving the peelability of the protective film from the support sheet.

熱硬化劑(B2)當中,例如,多官能酚樹脂、酚醛清漆型酚樹脂、二環戊二烯型酚樹脂、芳烷基型酚樹脂等樹脂成分的數量平均分子量,以300~30000為佳,以400~10000為更佳,以500~3000為特佳。 熱硬化劑(B2)當中,例如,聯苯酚、二氰二胺等非樹脂成分的分子量,雖然無特別限定,但例如以60~500為佳。Among the thermosetting agents (B2), for example, the number-average molecular weight of resin components such as polyfunctional phenol resin, novolac type phenol resin, dicyclopentadiene type phenol resin, and aralkyl type phenol resin is preferably 300 to 30,000 , 400~10000 is better, 500~3000 is especially good. Among the thermosetting agents (B2), for example, the molecular weight of non-resin components such as biphenol and dicyandiamide is not particularly limited, but is preferably 60 to 500, for example.

熱硬化劑(B2)可單獨使用1種,亦可並用2種以上,若為並用2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。One type of thermosetting agent (B2) may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination. If two or more types are used in combination, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜中,熱硬化劑(B2)的含量,相對於環氧樹脂(B1)的含量100質量份,以0.1~500質量份為佳,以1~200質量份為更佳,例如,可以是1~100質量份、1~50質量份、1~25質量份及1~10質量份等的任一者。藉由熱硬化劑(B2)的上述含量為上述下限值以上,熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的硬化變得更易於進行。此外,藉由熱硬化劑(B2)的上述含量為上述上限值以下,熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的吸濕率降低,使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得的封裝體的可靠度更加提升。In the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the content of the thermosetting agent (B2) is preferably 0.1 to 500 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the epoxy resin (B1). It is more preferably 1 to 200 parts by mass, for example, any one of 1 to 100 parts by mass, 1 to 50 parts by mass, 1 to 25 parts by mass, and 1 to 10 parts by mass. When the content of the thermosetting agent (B2) is equal to or greater than the above lower limit, curing of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film becomes easier. In addition, when the content of the thermosetting agent (B2) is equal to or lower than the upper limit, the moisture absorption rate of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film is reduced, and the reliability of the package obtained by using the composite sheet for forming a protective film is more reliable Promote.

在組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜中,熱硬化性成分(B)的含量(例如,環氧樹脂(B1)及熱硬化劑(B2)的總含量),相對於聚合物成分(A)的含量100質量份,以20~500質量份為佳,以30~300質量份為更佳,以40~150質量份為進一步更佳,例如,可以是45~100質量份及50~80質量份等的任一者。藉由熱硬化性成分(B)的上述含量為此等範圍,例如,保護膜形成用膜的硬化物與支撐片間的接著力受到抑制,提升支撐片的剝離性。In the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the content of the thermosetting component (B) (for example, the total content of the epoxy resin (B1) and the thermosetting agent (B2)), relative The content of the polymer component (A) is 100 parts by mass, preferably 20 to 500 parts by mass, more preferably 30 to 300 parts by mass, further preferably 40 to 150 parts by mass, for example, 45 to 100 parts Any one of mass parts and 50 to 80 mass parts. When the content of the thermosetting component (B) is in this range, for example, the adhesive force between the cured product of the protective film forming film and the support sheet is suppressed, and the peelability of the support sheet is improved.

[硬化促進劑(C)] 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜,亦可含有硬化促進劑(C)。硬化促進劑(C)為用以調整組合物(III-1)的硬化速度的成分。 作為較佳的硬化促進劑(C),可列舉,例如,三伸乙二胺、二甲苄胺、三乙醇胺、二甲胺乙醇、參(二甲胺甲基)酚等的三級胺;2-甲基咪唑、2-苯基咪唑、2-苯基-4-甲基咪唑、2-苯基-4,5-二羥甲基咪唑、2-苯基-4-甲基-5-羥甲基咪唑等的咪唑類(1個以上的氫原子被氫原子以外的基取代的咪唑);三丁基膦、二苯基膦、三苯基膦等的有機膦類(1個以上的氫原子被有機基取代的膦);四苯基硼酸四苯基鏻、四苯基硼酸三苯基膦等的四苯基硼鹽等。[Hardening accelerator (C)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a curing accelerator (C). The hardening accelerator (C) is a component for adjusting the hardening rate of the composition (III-1). Examples of preferred hardening accelerators (C) include, for example, tertiary amines such as triethylenediamine, dimethylbenzylamine, triethanolamine, dimethylamineethanol, and ginseng (dimethylaminomethyl)phenol; 2-methylimidazole, 2-phenylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4-methylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4,5-dihydroxymethylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4-methyl-5- Imidazoles such as hydroxymethylimidazole (imidazoles in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced by groups other than hydrogen atoms); organic phosphines such as tributylphosphine, diphenylphosphine, and triphenylphosphine (one or more) (Phosphines in which hydrogen atoms are replaced with organic groups); tetraphenyl boron salts such as tetraphenylphosphonium tetraphenylborate, triphenylphosphine tetraphenylborate, etc.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜所含有的硬化促進劑(C)可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The curing accelerator (C) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these may be arbitrarily selected The combination and ratio.

使用硬化促進劑(C)時,在組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜中,硬化促進劑(C)的含量,相對於熱硬化性成分(B)的含量100質量份,以0.01~10質量份為佳,以0.1~7質量份為更佳。藉由硬化促進劑(C)的上述含量為上述下限值以上,藉由使用硬化促進劑(C)所達成的效果可更加顯著。此外,藉由硬化促進劑(C)的含量為上述上限值以下,例如,高極性的硬化促進劑(C)抑制在高溫‧高濕度條件下,於熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜中與被附著體的接著界面側移動並偏析的效果變高,使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得的附保護膜的半導體晶片的可靠度更加提升。When the hardening accelerator (C) is used, the content of the hardening accelerator (C) in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film is 100% by mass relative to the content of the thermosetting component (B) Parts, preferably 0.01 to 10 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 7 parts by mass. When the above content of the hardening accelerator (C) is at least the above lower limit, the effect achieved by using the hardening accelerator (C) can be more remarkable. In addition, when the content of the hardening accelerator (C) is equal to or lower than the above upper limit, for example, the high-polarity hardening accelerator (C) is suppressed under high temperature and high humidity conditions in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film and The effect of the adhered body moving and segregating next to the interface side becomes higher, and the reliability of the semiconductor wafer with a protective film obtained by using the composite film for forming a protective film is further improved.

[填充材(D)] 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜,亦可含有填充材(D)。藉由熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜含有填充材(D),變得更容易將上述吸水率及黏著力變化率調整在作為目標的範圍內。此外,藉由熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜及保護膜含有填充材(D),熱膨脹係數的調節變得更容易,藉由針對熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜或保護膜之形成對象物將此熱膨脹係數最佳化,使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得的附保護膜的半導體晶片的可靠度更加提升。此外,藉由熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜含有填充材(D),可降低保護膜的吸濕率,提升散熱性。[Filling material (D)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a filler (D). By containing the filler (D) in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, it becomes easier to adjust the water absorption rate and the rate of change in adhesive force within the target range. In addition, since the film for forming a thermosetting protective film and the protective film contain a filler (D), the adjustment of the coefficient of thermal expansion becomes easier. For the film for forming a thermosetting protective film or the object to be formed of the protective film, This thermal expansion coefficient is optimized, and the reliability of the semiconductor wafer with a protective film obtained by using the composite film for forming a protective film is further improved. In addition, since the film for forming a thermosetting protective film contains a filler (D), the moisture absorption rate of the protective film can be reduced, and the heat dissipation can be improved.

填充材(D)可以是有機填充材及無機填充材的任一者,但以無機填充材為佳。 作為較佳的無機填充材,可列舉,例如,氧化矽、氧化鋁、滑石、碳酸鈣、鈦白、印度紅(Bengala)、碳化矽、氮化硼等的粉末;將此等無機填充材經球形化的珠粒;此等無機填充材的表面改質品;此等無機填充材的單結晶纖維;玻璃纖維等。 此等當中,無機填充材,以氧化矽或氧化鋁為佳,以氧化矽為更佳。The filler (D) may be either an organic filler or an inorganic filler, but it is preferably an inorganic filler. Examples of preferred inorganic fillers include powders of silicon oxide, alumina, talc, calcium carbonate, titanium white, Bengala, silicon carbide, and boron nitride. Sphericalized beads; surface modified products of these inorganic fillers; single crystal fibers of these inorganic fillers; glass fibers, etc. Among these, the inorganic filler is preferably silicon oxide or aluminum oxide, and more preferably silicon oxide.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜所含有的填充材(D),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The filler (D) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these may be arbitrarily selected The combination and ratio.

使用填充材(D)時,在組合物(III-1)中,相對於溶媒以外的全部成分的總含量的填充材(D)的含量的比率(亦即,熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的填充材(D)的含量),以5~80質量%為佳,以10~70質量%為更佳,例如,可以是20~65質量%、30~65質量%及40~65質量%等的任一者。藉由填充材(D)的含量為此等範圍,上述的熱膨脹係數的調整變得更容易,此外,保護膜形成用膜及保護膜的強度更加提升。When the filler (D) is used, in the composition (III-1), the content ratio of the filler (D) to the total content of all components other than the solvent (that is, the film for thermosetting protective film formation) Content of the filler (D)), preferably 5 to 80% by mass, more preferably 10 to 70% by mass, for example, 20 to 65% by mass, 30 to 65% by mass and 40 to 65% by mass Either. With the content of the filler (D) in this range, the adjustment of the aforementioned thermal expansion coefficient becomes easier, and the strength of the protective film forming film and the protective film is further improved.

[耦合劑(E)] 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜,亦可含有耦合劑(E)。作為耦合劑(E),藉由使用具有可與無機化合物或有機化合物反應的官能基者,可提升熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的對於被附著體的接著性及密著性。此外,藉由使用耦合劑(E),熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的硬化物(保護膜),不會損害耐熱性,並提升耐水性。[Coupling agent (E)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a coupling agent (E). As the coupling agent (E), by using a functional group that can react with an inorganic compound or an organic compound, the adhesion and adhesion of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film to an adherend can be improved. In addition, by using the coupling agent (E), the cured product (protective film) of the thermosetting protective film forming film does not impair heat resistance and improves water resistance.

耦合劑(E)以具有可與聚合物成分(A)、熱硬化性成分(B)等所具有的官能基反應的官能基的化合物為佳,以矽烷耦合劑為更佳。 作為較佳的上述矽烷耦合劑,可列舉,例如,3-環氧丙基氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-環氧丙基氧基丙基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、3-環氧丙基氧基丙基三乙氧基矽烷、3-環氧丙基氧基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、2-(3,4-環氧基環己基)乙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-甲基丙烯醯基氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-(2-胺基乙基胺基)丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-(2-胺基乙基胺基)丙基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、3-(苯基胺基)丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-苯胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-脲基丙基三乙氧基矽烷、3-巰基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-巰基丙基甲基二甲氧基矽烷、雙(3-三乙氧基矽烷基丙基)四硫化物、甲基三甲氧基矽烷、甲基三乙氧基矽烷、乙烯基三甲氧矽烷、乙烯基三乙醯氧基矽烷、咪唑矽烷等。The coupling agent (E) is preferably a compound having a functional group that can react with the functional group possessed by the polymer component (A), thermosetting component (B), etc., and more preferably a silane coupling agent. Preferred examples of the above-mentioned silane coupling agent include, for example, 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-cyclo Oxypropyloxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-epoxypropyloxymethyldiethoxysilane, 2-(3,4-epoxycyclohexyl)ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3 -Methacryloyloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-(2-aminoethylamino)propyltrimethoxysilane, 3-(2- (Aminoethylamino)propylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-(phenylamino)propyltrimethoxysilane, 3-anilinopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-ureidopropyltri Ethoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, bis(3-triethoxysilylpropyl) tetrasulfide, methyltrimethoxy Silane, methyltriethoxysilane, vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, imidazolesilane, etc.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜所含有的耦合劑(E),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The coupling agent (E) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these may be arbitrarily selected The combination and ratio.

使用耦合劑(E)時,在組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜中,耦合劑(E)的含量,相對於聚合物成分(A)及熱硬化性成分(B)的總含量100質量份,以0.03~20質量份為佳,以0.05~10質量份為更佳,以0.1~5質量份為特佳。藉由耦合劑(E)的上述含量為上述下限值以上,提升填充材(D)的對樹脂的分散性、提升熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的與被附著體的接著性等,藉由使用耦合劑(E)而達成的效果變得更加顯著。此外,藉由耦合劑(E)的上述含量為上述上限值以下,釋氣的發生更受到抑制。When the coupling agent (E) is used, the content of the coupling agent (E) in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film is relative to the polymer component (A) and the thermosetting component (B ) The total content is 100 parts by mass, preferably 0.03-20 parts by mass, more preferably 0.05-10 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1-5 parts by mass. When the content of the coupling agent (E) is equal to or higher than the lower limit, the dispersibility of the filler (D) to the resin, the adhesion between the film for forming a thermosetting protective film and the adherend, etc. are improved by The effect achieved by using the coupling agent (E) becomes more significant. In addition, when the content of the coupling agent (E) is equal to or less than the above upper limit value, the occurrence of outgassing is further suppressed.

[交聯劑(F)] 作為聚合物成分(A),當使用上述丙烯酸系樹脂等的具有可與其他化合物鍵結的乙烯基、(甲基)丙烯醯基、胺基、羥基、羧基、異氰酸酯基等官能基者時,組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜,亦可含有交聯劑(F)。交聯劑(F)是用以使聚合物成分(A)中的上述官能基與其他化合物鍵結並交聯的成分,藉由此類交聯,可調節熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的初期接著力及凝集力。[Crosslinking agent (F)] As the polymer component (A), when the acrylic resin and the like having functional groups such as vinyl groups, (meth)acryloyl groups, amine groups, hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, and isocyanate groups that can be bonded to other compounds are used, The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a crosslinking agent (F). The crosslinking agent (F) is a component for bonding and crosslinking the above functional groups in the polymer component (A) with other compounds, and by such crosslinking, the film for forming a thermosetting protective film can be adjusted Initial adhesion and cohesion.

作為交聯劑(F),可列舉,例如,有機多價異氰酸酯化合物、有機多價亞胺化合物、金屬螯合系交聯劑(具有金屬螯合構造的交聯劑)、氮丙啶系交聯劑(具有氮丙啶基的交聯劑)等。Examples of the crosslinking agent (F) include organic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, organic polyvalent imine compounds, metal chelate-based crosslinkers (crosslinkers with metal chelate structure), and aziridine-based crosslinkers. Linking agent (crosslinking agent with aziridine group), etc.

作為上述有機多價異氰酸酯化合物,可列舉,例如,芳香族多價異氰酸酯化合物、脂肪族多價異氰酸酯化合物及脂環族多價異氰酸酯化合物(以下,此等化合物合稱為「芳香族多價異氰酸酯化合物等」);上述芳香族多價異氰酸酯化合物等的三聚物、異氰尿酸酯及加成物;上述芳香族多價異氰酸酯化合物等與多元醇化合物反應而得的末端異氰酸酯胺甲酸乙酯預聚物等。上述「加成物」,是指上述芳香族多價異氰酸酯化合物、脂肪族多價異氰酸酯化合物或脂環族多價異氰酸酯化合物與乙二醇、丙二醇、新戊二醇、三羥甲基丙烷或蓖麻油等的低分子量含活性氫的化合物的反應產物。作為上述加成物之例,可列舉,如下述的三羥甲基丙烷的伸苯二甲基二異氰酸酯加成物等。此外,所謂「末端異氰酸酯胺基甲酸乙酯預聚物」,如先前所說明。Examples of the organic polyvalent isocyanate compound include, for example, aromatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, aliphatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, and alicyclic polyvalent isocyanate compounds (hereinafter, these compounds are collectively referred to as "aromatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds" Etc.); terpolymers, isocyanurates and adducts of the above-mentioned aromatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, etc.; and terminal isocyanate urethanes prepared by the reaction of the above-mentioned aromatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds and polyol compounds Polymer etc. The above-mentioned "adduct" means the above-mentioned aromatic polyvalent isocyanate compound, aliphatic polyvalent isocyanate compound or alicyclic polyvalent isocyanate compound and ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, neopentyl glycol, trimethylolpropane or castor Reaction products of low molecular weight active hydrogen-containing compounds such as sesame oil. Examples of the above-mentioned adducts include the following xylylene diisocyanate adducts of trimethylolpropane and the like. In addition, the "terminal isocyanate urethane prepolymer" is as previously explained.

作為上述有機多價異氰酸酯化合物,更具體而言,可列舉,例如,2,4-甲苯二異氰酸酯;2,6-甲苯二異氰酸酯;1,3-伸苯二甲基二異氰酸酯;1,4-伸苯二甲基二異氰酸酯;二苯基甲烷-4,4’-二異氰酸酯;二苯基甲烷-2,4’-二異氰酸酯;3-甲基二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯;六亞甲基二異氰酸酯;異佛爾酮二異氰酸酯;二環己基甲烷-4,4’-二異氰酸酯;二環己基甲烷-2,4’-二異氰酸酯;在三羥甲基丙烷等的多元醇的全部或一部分的羥基,加成甲苯二異氰酸酯、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯及伸苯二甲基二異氰酸酯的任1種或2種以上的化合物;離胺酸二異氰酸酯等。As the organic polyvalent isocyanate compound, more specifically, for example, 2,4-toluene diisocyanate; 2,6-toluene diisocyanate; 1,3-xylylene diisocyanate; 1,4- Xylylene diisocyanate; diphenylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate; diphenylmethane-2,4'-diisocyanate; 3-methyldiphenylmethane diisocyanate; hexamethylene di Isocyanate; isophorone diisocyanate; dicyclohexylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate; dicyclohexylmethane-2,4'-diisocyanate; all or part of polyols such as trimethylolpropane Hydroxyl, any one or more than two compounds of toluene diisocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, and xylylene diisocyanate; diamine isocyanate, etc.

作為上述有機多價亞胺化合物,可列舉,例如,N,N’-二苯基甲烷-4,4’-雙(1-氮丙啶羧醯胺)、三羥甲基丙烷-三-β-氮丙啶基丙酸酯、四羥甲基甲烷-三-β-氮丙啶基丙酸酯、N,N’-甲苯-2,4-雙(1-氮丙啶羧醯胺)三伸乙基三聚氰胺等。Examples of the organic polyvalent imine compound include, for example, N,N′-diphenylmethane-4,4′-bis(1-aziridinecarboxamide), trimethylolpropane-tri-β -Aziridinepropionate, tetramethylolmethane-tri-β-aziridinepropionate, N,N'-toluene-2,4-bis(1-aziridinecarboxamide) tri Ethyl melamine, etc.

使用有機多價異氰酸酯化合物作為交聯劑(F)時,作為聚合物成分(A),以使用含羥基的聚合物為佳。當交聯劑(F)具有異氰酸酯基,聚合物成分(A)具有羥基時,藉由交聯劑(F)與聚合物成分(A)的反應,可簡單地於熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜導入交聯構造。When an organic polyvalent isocyanate compound is used as the crosslinking agent (F), it is preferable to use a hydroxyl group-containing polymer as the polymer component (A). When the crosslinking agent (F) has an isocyanate group and the polymer component (A) has a hydroxyl group, the reaction of the crosslinking agent (F) and the polymer component (A) can be easily used for forming a thermosetting protective film The membrane introduces a cross-linked structure.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜所含有的交聯劑(F),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The crosslinking agent (F) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, you may choose this And other combinations and ratios.

當使用交聯劑(F)時,組合物(III-1)的交聯劑(F)的含量,相對於聚合物成分(A)的含量100質量份,以0.01~20質量份為佳,以0.1~10質量份為更佳,以0.5~5質量份為特佳。藉由交聯劑(F)的上述含量為上述下限值以上,使用交聯劑(F)而達成的效果變得更加顯著。此外,藉由交聯劑(F)的上述含量為上述上限值以下,交聯劑(F)的過量使用受到抑制。When the cross-linking agent (F) is used, the content of the cross-linking agent (F) of the composition (III-1) is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the polymer component (A). It is more preferably 0.1 to 10 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 0.5 to 5 parts by mass. When the content of the cross-linking agent (F) is at least the above lower limit, the effect achieved by using the cross-linking agent (F) becomes more remarkable. In addition, when the content of the crosslinking agent (F) is equal to or less than the above upper limit, excessive use of the crosslinking agent (F) is suppressed.

[能量線硬化性樹脂(G)] 組合物(III-1)亦可含有能量線硬化性樹脂(G)。藉由熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜含有能量線硬化性樹脂(G),藉由能量線的照射可使特性變化。[Energy Ray Curable Resin (G)] The composition (III-1) may contain an energy ray-curable resin (G). The film for forming a thermosetting protective film contains an energy ray-curable resin (G), and the characteristics can be changed by irradiation with energy ray.

能量線硬化性樹脂(G)為將能量線硬化性化合物進行聚合(硬化)而獲得者。 作為上述能量線硬化性化合物,可列舉,例如,在分子內具有至少1個的聚合性雙鍵的化合物,以具有(甲基)丙烯醯基的丙烯酸酯系化合物為佳。The energy ray-curable resin (G) is obtained by polymerizing (curing) the energy ray-curable compound. Examples of the energy ray-curable compounds include, for example, compounds having at least one polymerizable double bond in the molecule, and acrylate compounds having a (meth)acryloyl group are preferred.

作為上述丙烯酸酯系化合物,可列舉,例如,三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、四羥甲基甲烷四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇單羥基五(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,4-丁二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,6-己二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯等的含鏈狀脂肪族骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯;二環戊基二(甲基)丙烯酸酯等的含環狀脂肪族骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯等的聚烯烴二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯;寡酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯;胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚體;環氧改質(甲基)丙烯酸酯;上述聚烯烴二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯以外的聚醚(甲基)丙烯酸酯;伊康酸寡聚體等。Examples of the acrylate-based compound include trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, tetramethylolmethane tetra(meth)acrylate, neopentyltetraol tri(meth)acrylate, Neopentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol monohydroxypenta(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, 1,4-butanediol di(meth) (Meth) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate and other chain-containing aliphatic skeleton (meth) acrylate; dicyclopentyl di (meth) acrylate and other ring-containing Aliphatic (meth)acrylate; polyolefin glycol (meth)acrylate such as polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate; oligoester (meth)acrylate; urethane ( Meth)acrylate oligomer; epoxy modified (meth)acrylate; polyether (meth)acrylate other than the above polyolefin diol (meth)acrylate; itaconic acid oligomer, etc.

上述能量線硬化性化合物的重量平均分子量,以100~30000為佳,以300~10000為更佳。The weight average molecular weight of the energy ray-curable compound is preferably 100 to 30,000, and more preferably 300 to 10,000.

在聚合中所使用的上述能量線硬化性化合物,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The above energy ray-curable compounds used in the polymerization may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

組合物(III-1)含有的能量線硬化性樹脂(G),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The energy ray-curable resin (G) contained in the composition (III-1) may be only one type, or two or more types, and if there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

當使用能量線硬化性樹脂(G)時,組合物(III-1)的能量線硬化性樹脂(G)的含量,以1~95質量%為佳,以5~90質量%為更佳,以10~85質量%為特佳。When the energy ray-curable resin (G) is used, the content of the energy ray-curable resin (G) of the composition (III-1) is preferably 1 to 95% by mass, more preferably 5 to 90% by mass, 10 to 85% by mass is particularly preferred.

[光聚合起始劑(H)] 組合物(III-1)含有能量線硬化性樹脂(G)時,為了有效促進能量線硬化性樹脂(G)的聚合反應,亦可含有光聚合起始劑(H)。[Photopolymerization initiator (H)] When the composition (III-1) contains the energy ray curable resin (G), in order to effectively promote the polymerization reaction of the energy ray curable resin (G), a photopolymerization initiator (H) may be contained.

作為組合物(III-1)中的光聚合起始劑(H),可列舉,例如,苯偶姻、苯偶姻甲醚、苯偶姻乙醚、苯偶姻異丙醚、苯偶姻異丁醚、苯偶姻安息香酸、苯偶姻安息香酸甲酯、苯偶姻二甲基縮酮等的苯偶姻化合物;苯乙酮、2-羥基-2-甲基-1-苯基-丙烷-1-酮、2,2-二甲氧基-1,2-二苯乙烷-1-酮等的苯乙酮化合物;雙(2,4,6-三甲基苄醯基)苯基膦氧化物、2,4,6-三甲基苄醯基二苯基膦氧化物等的醯基膦氧化物化合物;苄基硫化苯、單硫化四甲基甲硫碳醯胺等的硫醚化合物;1-羥基環己基苯酮等的α-酮醇化合物;偶氮雙異丁腈等的偶氮化合物;二茂鈦等的二茂鈦化合物;硫雜蒽酮等的硫雜蒽酮化合物;過氧化物化合物;聯乙醯等的二酮化合物;苄;聯苄;二苯甲酮;2,4-二乙基硫雜蒽酮;1,2-二苯基甲烷;2-羥基-2-甲基-1-[4-(1-甲基乙烯基)苯基]丙酮;2-氯蒽醌等。 此外,作為上述光聚合起始劑,亦可列舉,例如,1-氯蒽醌等的醌化合物;胺等的光增感劑等。Examples of the photopolymerization initiator (H) in the composition (III-1) include, for example, benzoin, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, and benzoin isopropyl Benzoin compounds such as butyl ether, benzoin benzoic acid, benzoin benzoic acid methyl ester, benzoin dimethyl ketal, etc.; acetophenone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenyl- Acetophenone compounds such as propane-1-one, 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane-1-one; bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl)benzene Phosphine oxide compounds such as benzyl phosphine oxide, 2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl diphenyl phosphine oxide; sulfur such as benzyl sulfide benzene, tetramethyl methylsulfide carbamide sulfide Ether compounds; α-ketol compounds such as 1-hydroxycyclohexyl benzophenone; azo compounds such as azobisisobutyronitrile; titanocene compounds such as titanocene; thioxanthones such as thioxanthone Compounds; peroxide compounds; diketones such as diacetyl; benzyl; bibenzyl; benzophenone; 2,4-diethylthioxanthone; 1,2-diphenylmethane; 2-hydroxyl -2-methyl-1-[4-(1-methylvinyl)phenyl]acetone; 2-chloroanthraquinone, etc. In addition, examples of the photopolymerization initiator include quinone compounds such as 1-chloroanthraquinone; and photosensitizers such as amines.

組合物(III-1)所含有的光聚合起始劑(H),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The photopolymerization initiator (H) contained in the composition (III-1) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

當使用光聚合起始劑(H)時,在組合物(III-1)中,光聚合起始劑(H)的含量,相對於能量線硬化性樹脂(G)的含量100質量份,以0.1~20質量份為佳,以1~10質量份為更佳,以2~5質量份為特佳。When the photopolymerization initiator (H) is used, in the composition (III-1), the content of the photopolymerization initiator (H) relative to the content of the energy ray-curable resin (G) is 100 parts by mass, 0.1 to 20 parts by mass is better, 1 to 10 parts by mass is better, and 2 to 5 parts by mass is particularly preferable.

[著色劑(I)] 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜,亦可含有著色劑(I)。 作為著色劑(1),可列舉,例如,無機系顏料、有機系顏料、有機系染料等習知者。[Colorant (I)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a colorant (I). Examples of the colorant (1) include those known in the art such as inorganic pigments, organic pigments, and organic dyes.

作為上述有機系顏料及有機系染料,可列舉,例如,銨系色素、花青系色素、部花青素系色素、克酮酸(croconium)系色素、方酸菁系色素(squarylium)、薁鎓系色素(azulenium)、聚次甲基系色素(polymethine)、萘醌系色素(naphthoquinone)、吡喃系色素(pyrylium)、酞花青系色素(phthalocyanine)、萘酞菁系色素(naphthalocyanine)、萘二甲醯亞胺系色素(naphtholactam)、偶氮系色素、縮合偶氮系色素、靛青系色素(indigo)、紫環酮系色素(perinone)、苝系色素(perylene)、二噁嗪系色素(dioxazine)、煃吖啶酮系色素(quinacridone)、異吲哚啉酮系色素(isoindolinone)、喹啉黃系色素(quinophthalone)、吡咯系色素(pyrrole)、硫靛系色素(thioindigo)、金屬錯合物系色素(金屬錯鹽染料)、二硫酚金屬錯合物系色素、吲哚酚系色素(indole phenol)、三芳香基甲烷系色素、蒽醌系色素(anthraquinone)、二噁嗪色素、萘酚系色素(naphthol)、偶氮甲鹼系色素(azomethine)、苯并咪唑酮系色素(benzimidazolone)、皮蒽酮系色素(pyranthrone)及陰丹士林系色(indanthrene)等。Examples of the organic pigments and organic dyes include, for example, ammonium pigments, cyanine pigments, merocyanin pigments, croconium pigments, squarylium pigments, and azulium pigments. Azulenium, polymethine, naphthoquinone, pyrylium, phthalocyanine, naphthalocyanine , Naphtholactam-based pigments (naphtholactam), azo-based pigments, condensed azo-based pigments, indigo-based pigments (indigo), cyperone-based pigments (perinone), perylene-based pigments (perylene), dioxazine Dioxazine, quinacridone, isoindolinone, quinophthalone, pyrrole, thioindigo , Metal complex dyes (metal salt dyes), dithiophenol metal complex dyes, indole phenol dyes, triarylmethane dyes, anthraquinone dyes (anthraquinone), di Oxazine pigments, naphthol pigments (naphthol), azomethine pigments (azomethine), benzimidazolone pigments (benzimidazolone), pyranthrone pigments (pyranthrone) and indanthrene pigments (indanthrene) Wait.

作為上述無機系顏料,可列舉,例如,碳黑、鈷系色素、鐵系色素、鉻系色素、鈦系色素、釩系色素、鋯系色素、鉬系色素、釕系色素、鉑系色素、氧化銦錫(Indium Tin Oxide,ITO)系色素、氧化錫銻(Antimony Doped Tin Oxide ,ATO)系色素等。Examples of the inorganic pigments include carbon black, cobalt pigments, iron pigments, chromium pigments, titanium pigments, vanadium pigments, zirconium pigments, molybdenum pigments, ruthenium pigments, platinum pigments, Indium tin oxide (Indium Tin Oxide, ITO) based pigment, tin antimony oxide (Antimony Doped Tin Oxide, ATO) based pigment, etc.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜所含有的著色劑(I),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The coloring agent (I) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these may be arbitrarily selected The combination and ratio.

當使用著色劑(I)時,熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的著色劑(I)的含量,對應目的適當調節即可。例如,調節熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的著色劑(I)的含量,藉由調節保護膜的光穿透性,可調節對保護膜進行雷射印字時的印字辨識性。此外,藉由調節熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的著色劑(I)的含量,提升保護膜的設計性等,亦可以不易見到半導體晶圓的背面的研削痕。考量到這些,在組合物(III-1)中,相對於溶媒以外全部成分的總含量的著色劑(I)的含量的比率(亦即,熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的著色劑(I)的含量),以0.1~10質量%為佳,以0.1~7.5質量%為更佳,以0.1~5質量%為特佳。藉由著色劑(I)的上述含量為上述下限值以上,使用著色劑(I)所達成的效果變得更加顯著。此外,藉由著色劑(I)的上述含量為上述上限值以下,熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的光穿透性的過度降低受到抑制。When the coloring agent (I) is used, the content of the coloring agent (I) of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose. For example, by adjusting the content of the coloring agent (I) of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, by adjusting the light transmittance of the protective film, the legibility of the protective film during laser printing can be adjusted. In addition, by adjusting the content of the coloring agent (I) of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film and improving the designability of the protective film, it is also difficult to see the grinding marks on the back surface of the semiconductor wafer. In consideration of these, in the composition (III-1), the ratio of the content of the coloring agent (I) to the total content of all components other than the solvent (that is, the coloring agent (I ) Content), preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 7.5% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass. When the content of the colorant (I) is equal to or greater than the above lower limit, the effect achieved by using the colorant (I) becomes more remarkable. In addition, when the content of the colorant (I) is equal to or less than the upper limit value, the excessive decrease in light permeability of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film is suppressed.

[泛用添加劑(J)] 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜,在無損本發明效果的範圍內,亦可含有泛用添加劑(J)。 泛用添加劑(J)可以是習知者,可對應目的而任意選擇,並無特別限定,但作為較佳者,可列舉,例如,塑化劑、抗靜電劑、抗氧化劑、吸附劑等。[General Purpose Additive (J)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a general-purpose additive (J) within a range that does not impair the effect of the present invention. The general-purpose additive (J) may be a conventional one, and can be arbitrarily selected according to the purpose, and is not particularly limited, but preferred examples include plasticizers, antistatic agents, antioxidants, and adsorbents.

組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜所含有的泛用添加劑(J),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。 組合物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜的泛用添加劑(J)的含量,並無特別限定,對應目的適當選擇即可。The general-purpose additive (J) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, you can choose this arbitrarily And other combinations and ratios. The content of the general-purpose additive (J) of the composition (III-1) and the film for thermosetting protective film formation is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose.

[溶媒] 組合物(III-1)以進一步含有溶媒為佳。含有溶媒的組合物(III-1),其操作性變得良好。 上述溶媒並無特別限定,但作為較佳者,可列舉,例如,甲苯、茬等的烴;甲醇、乙醇、2-丙醇、異丁醇(2-甲基丙烷-1-醇)、1-丁醇等的醇;乙酸乙酯等的酯;丙酮、丁酮等的酮;四氫呋喃等的醚;二甲基甲醯胺、N-甲基吡咯烷酮等的醯胺(具有醯胺鍵的化合物)等。 組合物(III-1)所含有的溶媒,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。[Solvent] It is preferable that the composition (III-1) further contains a solvent. The composition (III-1) containing the solvent has good handleability. The above solvent is not particularly limited, but preferred ones include, for example, hydrocarbons such as toluene and stubble; methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, isobutanol (2-methylpropane-1-ol), 1 -Alcohols such as butanol; esters such as ethyl acetate; ketones such as acetone and methyl ethyl ketone; ethers such as tetrahydrofuran; amides such as dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone (compounds having an amide bond )Wait. The solvent contained in the composition (III-1) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

組合物(III-1)所含有的溶媒,從可更均勻混合組合物(III-1)中的含有成分的觀點而言,以丁酮等為佳。The solvent contained in the composition (III-1) is preferably methyl ethyl ketone or the like from the viewpoint that the components contained in the composition (III-1) can be more uniformly mixed.

>>熱硬化性保護膜形成用組合物的製造方法>> 組合物(III-1)等的熱硬化性保護膜形成用組合物可藉由將用以構成其的各成分進行調配而獲得。 各成分的調配時,添加順序並無特別限定,可同時添加2種以上的成分。 使用溶媒時,可將溶媒與溶媒以外的任一調配成分混合而預先稀釋此調配成分來使用,亦可不預先稀釋溶媒以外的任一調配成分而將溶媒與此等調配成分混合來使用。 調配時混合各成分的方法並無特別限定,使攪拌子或攪拌翼等旋轉而混合的方法;使用混合機的混合方法;施加超音波的混合方法等,從習知方法適當選擇即可。 各成分的添加及混合時的溫度以及時間,只要各調配成分不會劣化則無特別限定,適當調節即可,但溫度以15~30℃為佳。>>Production method of thermosetting protective film forming composition>> The composition for forming a thermosetting protective film such as the composition (III-1) can be obtained by blending the components that constitute it. In the preparation of each component, the order of addition is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added simultaneously. When a solvent is used, the solvent may be mixed with any formulation component other than the solvent to dilute the formulation component in advance, or may be used by mixing the solvent with these formulation components without diluting any formulation component other than the solvent in advance. The method of mixing the components at the time of preparation is not particularly limited, and the method of rotating and mixing the stirrer, the stirring blade, etc.; the mixing method using a mixer; the mixing method using ultrasonic waves, etc., may be appropriately selected from known methods. The temperature and time at the time of addition and mixing of each component are not particularly limited as long as each formulated component does not deteriorate, and may be adjusted appropriately, but the temperature is preferably 15 to 30°C.

○能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜 作為能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜,可列舉含有能量線硬化性成分(a)者,以含有能量線硬化性成分(a)及填充材者為佳。 在能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜中,能量線硬化性成分(a),以未硬化為佳,以具有黏著性為佳,以未硬化且具有黏著性為更佳。在此,「能量線」及「能量線硬化性」如先前所說明。○Energy ray-curable protective film forming film Examples of the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film include those containing an energy ray curable component (a), and those containing an energy ray curable component (a) and a filler are preferred. In the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film, the energy ray-curable component (a) is preferably uncured, preferably adhesive, and more preferably uncured and adhesive. Here, "energy ray" and "energy ray hardenability" are as previously explained.

將能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜貼附在半導體晶圓的背面後,使其硬化時的硬化條件,只要硬化物能達到充分發揮其功能程度的硬化度則無特別限定,對應能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜的種類,適當選擇即可。 例如,在能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜的硬化時,能量線的照度,以120~280mW/cm2 為佳。然後,在上述硬化時,能量線的光量,以100~1000mJ/cm2 為佳。After the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film is attached to the back surface of a semiconductor wafer, curing conditions for curing are not particularly limited as long as the cured product can achieve a degree of curing that fully exerts its function. The type of film for forming a protective film may be appropriately selected. For example, when curing the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film, the illuminance of the energy ray is preferably 120 to 280 mW/cm 2 . Then, in the above hardening, the amount of light of the energy ray is preferably 100 to 1000 mJ/cm 2 .

>能量線硬化性保護且莫形成用組合物(IV-1)> 作為較佳的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組合物,可列舉,例如,含有上述能量線硬化性成分(a)的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組合物(IV-1)(在本說明書中,有時簡稱為「組合物(IV-1)」)等。>Energy ray-hardenable protective and non-forming composition (IV-1)> Examples of the preferred composition for forming an energy ray curable protective film include, for example, the composition for forming an energy ray curable protective film (IV-1) containing the aforementioned energy ray curable component (a) (in this specification In some cases, it is abbreviated as "composition (IV-1)").

[能量線硬化性成分(a)] 能量線硬化性成分(a)為藉由能量線的照射而硬化的成分,用以在能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜賦予造膜性、可撓性等,同時在硬化後形成硬質的保護膜的成分。 作為能量線硬化性成分(a),可列舉,例如,具有能量線硬化性基且重量平均分子量為80000~2000000的聚合物(a1)以及具有能量線硬化性基且分子量為100~80000的化合物(a2)。上述聚合物(a1)可以是在其至少一部藉由交聯劑而交聯而成,亦可以是沒有交聯者。[Energy ray hardening component (a)] The energy ray-curable component (a) is a component that is cured by irradiation of energy ray, and is used to impart film-forming properties, flexibility, etc. to the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film, while forming hard protection after curing The composition of the membrane. Examples of the energy ray-curable component (a) include, for example, a polymer (a1) having an energy ray-curable group and a weight average molecular weight of 80,000 to 2,000,000, and a compound having an energy ray-curable group and a molecular weight of 100 to 80,000 (a2). The above-mentioned polymer (a1) may be cross-linked by a cross-linking agent in at least a part thereof, or may be one without cross-linking.

(具有能量線硬化性基且重量平均分子量為80000~2000000的聚合物(a1)) 作為具有能量線硬化性基且重量平均分子量為80000~2000000的聚合物(a1),可列舉,例如,將具有可與其他化合物具有的基反應的官能基的丙烯酸系聚合物(a11),與具有與上述官能基反應的基以及能量線硬化性雙鍵等的能量線硬化性基的能量線硬化性化合物(a12)進行反應而成的丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)。(Polymer (a1) with an energy ray-curable group and a weight average molecular weight of 80,000 to 2,000,000) Examples of the polymer (a1) having an energy ray-curable group and a weight average molecular weight of 80,000 to 2,000,000 include, for example, an acrylic polymer (a11) having a functional group that can react with groups that other compounds have, and An acrylic resin (a1-1) obtained by reacting an energy ray-curable compound (a12) having an energy ray-curable group such as a group reactive with the functional group and an energy ray-curable double bond.

作為可與其他化合物具有的基反應的上述官能基,可列舉,例如,羥基、羧基、胺基、取代胺基(胺基的1個或2個氫原子被氫原子以外的基取代而成的基)、環氧基等。但是,從防止半導體晶圓、半導體晶片等的電路的腐蝕的觀點而言,上述官能基,以羧基以外的基為佳。 此等當中,上述官能基,以羥基為佳。Examples of the above functional groups that can react with groups possessed by other compounds include, for example, hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, amine groups, and substituted amine groups (one or two hydrogen atoms of an amine group are substituted with groups other than hydrogen atoms) Radical), epoxy, etc. However, from the viewpoint of preventing corrosion of circuits such as semiconductor wafers and semiconductor wafers, the functional group is preferably a group other than a carboxyl group. Among these, the above functional group is preferably a hydroxyl group.

•具有官能基的丙烯酸系聚合物(a11) 作為具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系聚合物(a11),可列舉,例如,將具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,與不具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體進行共聚合而成者,此等單體以外,還有丙烯酸系單體以外的單體(非丙烯酸系單體)進行共聚合者亦可。 此外,上述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)可以是隨機共聚物,亦可以是嵌段共聚物,有關聚合方法,可採用習知的方法。•Acrylic polymer with functional groups (a11) Examples of the acrylic polymer (a11) having the above functional group include, for example, those obtained by copolymerizing an acrylic monomer having the above functional group with an acrylic monomer not having the above functional group, etc. In addition to monomers, monomers other than acrylic monomers (non-acrylic monomers) may be copolymerized. In addition, the acrylic polymer (a11) may be a random copolymer or a block copolymer, and a conventional method can be used for the polymerization method.

作為具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,可列舉,例如,含羥基的單體、含羧基的單體、含胺基的單體、含取代胺基的單體、含環氧基的單體等。Examples of the acrylic monomer having the above functional group include, for example, a hydroxyl group-containing monomer, a carboxyl group-containing monomer, an amine group-containing monomer, a substituted amine group-containing monomer, and an epoxy group-containing monomer Wait.

作為上述含羥基的單體,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯酸羥甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸4-羥丁酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸酯羥烷基;乙烯醇、烯丙醇等的非(甲基)丙烯酸系不飽和醇(不具有(甲基)丙烯醯基骨架的不飽和醇)等。Examples of the hydroxyl group-containing monomers include, for example, hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth)acrylic acid 3. -(Meth)acrylate hydroxyalkyl such as hydroxypropyl ester, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate; ethylene Non-(meth)acrylic unsaturated alcohols such as alcohols and allyl alcohols (unsaturated alcohols that do not have a (meth)acryloyl skeleton) and the like.

作為上述含羧基的單體,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯酸、丁烯酸等的乙烯性不飽和單羧酸(具有乙烯性不飽和鍵結的單羧酸);富馬酸、伊康酸、馬來酸、檸康酸等的乙烯性不飽和二羧酸(具有乙烯性不飽和鍵結的二羧酸);上述乙烯性不飽和二羧酸的酸酐;甲基丙烯酸2-羧乙酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸羧烷基酯等。Examples of the carboxyl group-containing monomers include, for example, (meth)acrylic acid, crotonic acid and other ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acids (monocarboxylic acids having an ethylenically unsaturated bond); fumaric acid, and Ethylene unsaturated dicarboxylic acids (condensation of dicarboxylic acids with ethylenically unsaturated bonds) such as carboxylic acid, maleic acid, citraconic acid, etc.; anhydrides of the above ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids; 2-carboxyl methacrylic acid Carboxyalkyl (meth)acrylates such as ethyl esters.

具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,以含羥基的單體為佳。The acrylic monomer having the above functional group is preferably a hydroxyl group-containing monomer.

構成上述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)且具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The acrylic monomer constituting the acrylic polymer (a11) and having the functional group may be only one type, or two or more types, and if there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

作為不具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二酯((甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四酯((甲基)丙烯酸肉豆蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六酯((甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八酯((甲基)丙烯酸硬脂醯酯)等的構成烷基酯的烷基為碳數1~18的鏈狀構造的(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯等。Examples of the acrylic monomer that does not have the above functional group include, for example, methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, and isopropyl (meth)acrylate , N-butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, secondary butyl (meth)acrylate, tertiary butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, (meth) ) Hexyl acrylate, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, n-nonyl (meth)acrylate Ester, isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, dodecyl (meth)acrylate (lauryl (meth)acrylate), (meth) Tridecyl acrylate, myristyl (meth)acrylate (myristyl (meth)acrylate), pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, cetyl (meth)acrylate (palmityl (meth)acrylate) , The alkyl group constituting the alkyl ester, such as heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, stearyl (meth)acrylate (stearyl (meth)acrylate), etc., has a chain structure of 1 to 18 carbon atoms ( Alkyl methacrylate etc.

此外,作為不具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,可列舉,例如,包括(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基乙酯等的含烷氧基烷基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯;(甲基)丙烯酸苯酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸芳基酯等,具有芳香族基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯;非交聯性的(甲基)丙烯醯胺及其衍生物;(甲基)丙烯酸N,N-二甲基胺基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸N,N-二甲基胺基丙酯等的具有非交聯性的三級胺基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。In addition, examples of the acrylic monomer that does not have the aforementioned functional group include, for example, methoxymethyl (meth)acrylate, methoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, and ethoxy (meth)acrylate. Alkoxyalkyl group-containing (meth)acrylates such as methyl ester, ethoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, etc.; aryl (meth)acrylates such as phenyl (meth)acrylate, etc., have aromatic Group-based (meth)acrylate; non-crosslinkable (meth)acrylamide and its derivatives; (meth)acrylic acid N,N-dimethylaminoethyl, (meth)acrylic acid N , N-dimethylaminopropyl esters, etc. (meth)acrylates with non-crosslinkable tertiary amino groups.

構成上述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)且不具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The acrylic monomer that constitutes the acrylic polymer (a11) and does not have the functional group may be only one type, or two or more types, and if there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected .

作為上述非丙烯酸系單體,可列舉,例如,乙烯、降莰烯等的烯烴;乙酸乙烯酯;苯乙烯等。 構成上述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)的上述非丙烯酸系單體,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。Examples of the non-acrylic monomers include olefins such as ethylene and norbornene; vinyl acetate; and styrene. The non-acrylic monomer constituting the acrylic polymer (a11) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在上述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)中,相對於構成其構成單元的全部量,從具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體衍生的構成單元的量的比率(含量),以0.1~50質量%為佳,以1~40質量%為更佳,以3~30質量%為特佳。藉由上述比率在此等範圍,在藉由上述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)與上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)的共聚合所得的上述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)中,能量線硬化性基的含量變得易於將保護膜的硬化的程度調整在較佳的範圍。In the acrylic polymer (a11), the ratio (content) of the amount of the structural unit derived from the acrylic monomer having the functional group with respect to the total amount of the structural unit constituting it is 0.1 to 50% by mass as It is better, 1 to 40% by mass is better, and 3 to 30% by mass is particularly good. With these ratios in these ranges, in the acrylic resin (a1-1) obtained by copolymerizing the acrylic polymer (a11) and the energy ray-curable compound (a12), the energy ray-curable The content of the base becomes easy to adjust the degree of hardening of the protective film to a preferable range.

構成上述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)的上述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The acrylic polymer (a11) constituting the acrylic resin (a1-1) may be only one type, or two or more types, and if there are two or more types, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected.

在組合物(IV-1)中,相對於溶媒以外的成分的總含量,丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)的含量的比率(亦即,能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜的丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)的含量),以1~70質量%為佳,以5~60質量%為更佳,以10~50質量%為特佳。In the composition (IV-1), the ratio of the content of the acrylic resin (a1-1) relative to the total content of the components other than the solvent (that is, the acrylic resin of the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film ( The content of a1-1)) is preferably 1 to 70% by mass, more preferably 5 to 60% by mass, and particularly preferably 10 to 50% by mass.

•能量線硬化性化合物(a12) 上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12),作為可與上述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)具有的官能基反應的基,以具有選自異氰酸酯基、環氧基及羧基所成群組的1種或2種以上者為佳,作為上述基,以具有異氰酸酯基者為更佳。上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12),例如為具有異氰酸酯基作為上述基時,此異氰酸酯基易於與具有羥基作為上述官能基的丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)的此羥基反應。•Energy ray hardening compound (a12) The energy ray-curable compound (a12), as a group reactive with the functional group of the acrylic polymer (a11), has one or two selected from the group consisting of isocyanate groups, epoxy groups, and carboxyl groups More than one kind is preferable. As the above-mentioned group, those having an isocyanate group are more preferable. When the energy ray-curable compound (a12) has, for example, an isocyanate group as the group, the isocyanate group easily reacts with the hydroxyl group of the acrylic polymer (a11) having a hydroxyl group as the functional group.

上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12),以1分子中具有1~5個上述能量線硬化性基者為佳,以具有1~3個者為更佳。The energy ray curable compound (a12) is preferably one having 1 to 5 energy ray curable groups per molecule, and more preferably 1 to 3.

作為上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12),可列舉,例如,2-甲基丙烯醯基氧基乙基異氰酸酯、間-異丙烯基-α,α-二甲基苄基異氰酸酯、甲基丙烯醯基異氰酸酯、烯丙基異氰酸酯、1,1-(雙丙烯醯基氧基甲基)乙基異氰酸酯; 藉由二異氰酸酯化合物或聚異氰酸酯化合物與羥乙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯反應所得的丙烯醯基單異氰酸酯化合物; 藉由二異氰酸酯化合物或聚異氰酸酯化合物與多元醇化合物與羥乙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯反應所得的丙烯醯基單異氰酸酯化合物等。 此等當中,上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12),以2-甲基丙烯醯基氧基乙基異氰酸酯為佳。Examples of the energy ray curable compound (a12) include, for example, 2-methacryloxyethyl isocyanate, m-isopropenyl-α,α-dimethylbenzyl isocyanate, and methacryl Isocyanate, allyl isocyanate, 1,1-(bisacryloyloxymethyl) ethyl isocyanate; Acryloyl monoisocyanate compound obtained by reacting diisocyanate compound or polyisocyanate compound with hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate; An acrylic monoisocyanate compound obtained by reacting a diisocyanate compound or a polyisocyanate compound with a polyol compound and hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, etc. Among these, the energy ray-curable compound (a12) is preferably 2-methacryloyloxyethyl isocyanate.

構成上述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)的上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The energy ray-curable compound (a12) constituting the acrylic resin (a1-1) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these combinations and ratios may be arbitrarily selected .

在上述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)中,相對於來自上述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)的上述官能基的含量,來自上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)的能量線硬化性基的含量的比率,以20~120莫耳%為佳,以35~100莫耳%為更佳,以50~100莫耳%為特佳。藉由上述含量的比率在此等範圍,硬化後的保護膜的接著力變得更大。另外,當上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)為1官能(在1分子中具有1個上述基)化合物時,雖然上述含量的比率的上限值為100莫耳%,但當上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)為多官能(在1分子中具有2個以上的上述基)化合物時,上述含量的比率的上限值有時會超過100莫耳%。In the acrylic resin (a1-1), relative to the content of the functional group derived from the acrylic polymer (a11), the ratio of the content of the energy ray curable group derived from the energy ray curable compound (a12) , Preferably 20 to 120 mol%, 35 to 100 mol% is even better, and 50 to 100 mol% is especially good. When the ratio of the content is within these ranges, the adhesion of the protective film after hardening becomes greater. In addition, when the energy ray-curable compound (a12) is a monofunctional (having one of the above groups in one molecule) compound, although the upper limit of the content ratio is 100 mol%, when the energy ray is hardened When the sexual compound (a12) is a polyfunctional (having two or more of the above groups in one molecule) compound, the upper limit of the content ratio may exceed 100 mol%.

上述聚合物(a1)的重量平均分子量(Mw),以100000~2000000為佳,以300000~1500000為更佳。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer (a1) is preferably 100,000 to 2,000,000, and more preferably 300,000 to 1,500,000.

當上述聚合物(a1)為其至少一部分藉由交聯劑而交聯而成時,上述聚合物(a1),可以是將不相當於作為構成上述丙烯酸系聚合物(a11)者所說明的上述單體的任一者且具有與交聯劑反應的基的單體進行聚合,在上述與交聯劑反應的基進行交聯而成,亦可以是來自上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12),在上述與官能基反應的基進行交聯而成。When the polymer (a1) is crosslinked with at least a part of it by a crosslinking agent, the polymer (a1) may not be described as equivalent to those constituting the acrylic polymer (a11) A monomer having any of the above monomers and having a group that reacts with a crosslinking agent is polymerized and crosslinked with the group that reacts with the crosslinking agent, or may be derived from the above energy ray-curable compound (a12) , It is formed by crosslinking the above groups that react with the functional groups.

組合物(IV-1)及能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜所含有的上述聚合物(a1),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The above-mentioned polymer (a1) contained in the composition (IV-1) and the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if two or more kinds, they may be arbitrarily selected These combinations and ratios.

(具有能量線硬化性基且分子量為100~80000的化合物(a2)) 作為具有能量線硬化性基且分子量為100~80000的化合物(a2)中的上述能量線硬化性基,可列舉含有能量線硬化性雙鍵的基,作為較佳者,可列舉(甲基)丙烯醯基、乙烯基等。(Compound (a2) with an energy ray-curable group and a molecular weight of 100 to 80,000) Examples of the energy ray-curable group in the compound (a2) having an energy ray-curable group and a molecular weight of 100 to 80,000 include a group containing an energy ray-curable double bond, and preferred ones include (methyl) Acryloyl, vinyl, etc.

上述化合物(a2),只要是滿足上述條件者,並無特別限定,但可列舉具有能量線硬化性基的低分子量化合物、具有能量線硬化性基的環氧樹脂、具有能量線硬化性基的酚樹脂等。The compound (a2) is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the above conditions, but examples thereof include a low molecular weight compound having an energy ray-curable group, an epoxy resin having an energy ray-curable group, and one having an energy ray-curable group Phenol resin etc.

上述化合物(a2)當中,作為具有能量線硬化性基的低分子量化合物,可列舉例如,多官能的單體或寡聚體等,以具有(甲基)丙烯醯基的丙烯酸酯系化合物為佳。 作為上述丙烯酸酯系化合物,可列舉,例如,2-羥基-3-(甲基)丙烯醯基氧基丙基甲基丙烯酸酯、聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、丙氧基化乙氧基化雙酚A二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯醯基氧基聚乙氧基)苯基]丙烷、乙氧基化雙酚A二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯醯基氧基二乙氧基)苯基]丙烷、9,9-雙[4-(2-(甲基)丙烯醯基氧基乙氧基)苯基]茀、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯醯基氧基聚丙氧基)苯基]丙烷、三環癸烷二甲醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,10-癸二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,6-己二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,9-壬二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚四亞甲基二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯醯基氧基乙氧基)苯基]丙烷、新戊二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、乙氧基化聚丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、2-羥基-1,3-二(甲基)丙烯醯基氧基丙烷等的2官能(甲基)丙烯酸酯; 參(2-(甲基)丙烯醯基氧基乙基)異氰尿酸酯、ε-己內酯改質參-(2-(甲基)丙烯醯基氧基乙基)異氰尿酸酯、乙氧基化丙三醇三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二三羥甲基丙烷四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、乙氧基化新戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇聚(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯等的多官能(甲基)丙烯酸酯; 胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚體等的多官能(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚體等。Among the above compounds (a2), examples of the low-molecular-weight compound having an energy ray-curable group include polyfunctional monomers and oligomers, and the acrylate-based compound having a (meth)acryloyl group is preferred. . Examples of the acrylate-based compound include 2-hydroxy-3-(meth)acryloxypropyl methacrylate, polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, and propoxylation. Ethoxylated bisphenol A di(meth)acrylate, 2,2-bis[4-((meth)acryloyloxypolyethoxy)phenyl]propane, ethoxylated bisphenol A Di(meth)acrylate, 2,2-bis[4-((meth)acryloyloxydiethoxy)phenyl]propane, 9,9-bis[4-(2-(methyl ) Propylene acetyloxyethoxy) phenyl] stilbene, 2,2-bis[4-((meth)acryl oxypolypropyloxy) phenyl] propane, tricyclodecane dimethanol di( Meth)acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di(meth)acrylate , Dipropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, tripropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polytetramethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, ethylene glycol di (Meth)acrylate, diethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, triethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, 2,2-bis[4-((meth)acryloyloxyethyl Oxy)phenyl]propane, neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate, ethoxylated polypropylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxy-1,3-di(meth)acryl 2-functional (meth)acrylates such as oxypropane; Ginseng (2-(meth)acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, ε-caprolactone modified Ginseng-(2-(meth)acryloyloxyethyl)isocyanuric acid Ester, ethoxylated glycerol tri(meth)acrylate, neopentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, ditrimethylolpropane tetra(meth)acrylate Methacrylates, ethoxylated neopentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylates, neopentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylates, dipentaerythritol poly(meth)acrylates, dineopentyl Multifunctional (meth)acrylates such as tetraol hexa(meth)acrylate; Multifunctional (meth)acrylate oligomers such as urethane (meth)acrylate oligomers and the like.

上述化合物(a2)當中,作為具有能量線硬化性基的環氧樹脂、具有能量線硬化性基的酚樹脂,例如,可使用「日本特開2013-194102號公報」的段落0043等中所記載者。雖然此類樹脂符合構成下述熱硬化性成分的樹脂,但在本發明中作為上述化合物(a2)採用。Among the above compounds (a2), as the epoxy resin having an energy ray-curable group and the phenol resin having an energy ray-curable group, for example, the description in Paragraph 0043 of "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-194102" can be used. By. Although this type of resin conforms to the resin constituting the thermosetting component described below, it is adopted as the above-mentioned compound (a2) in the present invention.

上述化合物(a2)的重量平均分子量,以100~30000為佳,以300~10000為更佳。The weight average molecular weight of the compound (a2) is preferably 100 to 30,000, and more preferably 300 to 10,000.

組合物(IV-1)及能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜含有的上述化合物(a2),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The above-mentioned compound (a2) contained in the composition (IV-1) and the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these may be arbitrarily selected The combination and ratio.

[不具有能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b)] 組合物(IV-1)及能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜,當含有上述化合物(a2)作為上述能量線硬化性成分(a)時,以進一步含有不具有能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b)者為佳。 上述聚合物(b)可以是其至少一部分藉由交聯劑而交聯而成,亦可以是 沒有交聯者。[Polymer (b) without energy ray-curable group] The composition (IV-1) and the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film, when containing the compound (a2) as the energy ray-curable component (a), further contain a polymer having no energy ray-curable group (b) is better. The above polymer (b) may be cross-linked by at least a part of it with a cross-linking agent, or it may be There is no cross-linker.

作為不具有能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b),可列舉,例如,丙烯酸系聚合物、苯氧基樹脂、胺甲酸乙酯樹脂、聚酯、橡膠系樹脂、丙烯酸胺甲酸乙酯樹脂等。 此等當中,上述聚合物(b),以丙烯酸系聚合物(以下,簡稱為「丙烯酸系聚合物(b-1)」)為佳。Examples of the polymer (b) having no energy ray-curable groups include acrylic polymers, phenoxy resins, urethane resins, polyesters, rubber-based resins, and acrylic urethane resins. . Among these, the polymer (b) is preferably an acrylic polymer (hereinafter, simply referred to as "acrylic polymer (b-1)").

丙烯酸系聚合物(b-1)可為習知者,例如,可以是1種丙烯酸系單體的單獨聚合物,亦可以是2種以上的丙烯酸系單體的共聚物,亦可以是1種或2種以上的丙烯酸系單體與1種或2種以上的丙烯酸系單體以外的單體(非丙烯酸系單體)的共聚物。The acrylic polymer (b-1) may be known, for example, it may be a single polymer of one acrylic monomer, or a copolymer of two or more acrylic monomers, or may be one Or a copolymer of two or more acrylic monomers and a monomer (non-acrylic monomer) other than one or more acrylic monomers.

作為構成丙烯酸系聚合物(b-1)的上述丙烯酸系單體,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯、具有環狀骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含環氧丙基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含羥基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含取代胺基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。在此,「取代胺基」基,如先前所說明。Examples of the acrylic monomer constituting the acrylic polymer (b-1) include, for example, alkyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylate having a cyclic skeleton, and epoxy-containing (Meth)acrylate, hydroxyl-containing (meth)acrylate, substituted amine group-containing (meth)acrylate, etc. Here, the "substituted amine" group is as previously described.

作為上述(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二酯 ((甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四酯 ((甲基)丙烯酸肉豆蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六酯 ((甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八酯 ((甲基)丙烯酸硬脂醯酯)等的構成烷基酯的烷基為碳數1~18的鏈狀構造的(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯等。Examples of the above-mentioned alkyl (meth)acrylate include, for example, methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, N-butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, secondary butyl (meth)acrylate, tertiary butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, (meth) Hexyl acrylate, heptyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, isooctyl (meth) acrylate, n-octyl (meth) acrylate, n-nonyl (meth) acrylate , Isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, dodecyl (meth)acrylate (lauryl (meth)acrylate), (meth)acrylic acid Tridecyl ester, myristyl (meth)acrylate (myristyl (meth)acrylate), pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, cetyl (meth)acrylate (palmityl (meth)acrylate), The alkyl group constituting the alkyl ester, such as heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, stearyl (meth)acrylate (stearyl (meth)acrylate), etc., has a chain structure of 1 to 18 carbon atoms (a Group) alkyl acrylate, etc.

作為上述具有環狀骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯酸異莰酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸環烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸苄酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸芳烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸酯二環戊烯基等的(甲基)丙烯酸環烯基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸二環烯基氧基乙基酯等的(甲基)丙烯酸環烯基氧基烷基酯等。Examples of the (meth)acrylate having a cyclic skeleton include, for example, cycloalkyl (meth)acrylate such as isobornyl (meth)acrylate and dicyclopentyl (meth)acrylate; Aralkyl (meth)acrylates such as benzyl (meth)acrylate; (Meth)acrylate dicyclopentenyl and other (meth)acrylate cycloalkenyl esters; Cycloalkenyloxyalkyl (meth)acrylate and the like, such as dicycloalkenyloxyethyl (meth)acrylate.

作為上述含環氧丙基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯酸環氧丙酯等。 作為上述含羥基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯酸羥甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸4-羥丁酯等。 作為上述含取代胺基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯,可列舉,例如,(甲基)丙烯酸N-甲基胺基乙酯等。Examples of the glycidyl group-containing (meth)acrylates include, for example, glycidyl (meth)acrylate. Examples of the above-mentioned hydroxyl-containing (meth)acrylate include, for example, hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth) Group) 3-hydroxypropyl acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, and the like. Examples of the substituted amine group-containing (meth)acrylate include, for example, N-methylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate.

作為構成丙烯酸系聚合物(b-1)的上述非丙烯酸系單體,可列舉,例如,乙烯、降莰烯等的烯烴;乙酸乙烯酯;苯乙烯等。Examples of the non-acrylic monomers constituting the acrylic polymer (b-1) include olefins such as ethylene and norbornene; vinyl acetate; and styrene.

作為至少一部分藉由交聯劑而交聯且不具有上述能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b),可列舉,例如,上述聚合物(b)中的反應性官能基與交聯劑反應而成者。 上述反應性官能基,只要對應交聯劑的種類等而適當選擇即可,並無特別限定。例如,當交聯劑為聚異氰酸酯化合物時,作為上述反應性官能基,可列舉羥基、羧基、胺基等,此等當中,以與異氰酸酯基的反應性高的羥基為佳。此外,當交聯劑為環氧系化合物時,作為上述反應性官能基,可列舉羧基、胺基、醯胺基等,此等當中,以與環氧基的反應性高的羧基為佳。但是,從防止半導體晶圓、半導體晶片的電路的腐蝕的觀點而言,上述反應性官能基,以羧基以外的基為佳。Examples of the polymer (b) that is crosslinked with at least a part by a crosslinking agent and does not have the energy ray-curable group include, for example, a reactive functional group in the polymer (b) and a crosslinking agent react to Successful. The reactive functional group is not particularly limited as long as it is appropriately selected according to the type of crosslinking agent and the like. For example, when the crosslinking agent is a polyisocyanate compound, the reactive functional group may include a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, an amine group, and the like. Among these, a hydroxyl group having high reactivity with an isocyanate group is preferred. In addition, when the crosslinking agent is an epoxy-based compound, examples of the reactive functional group include a carboxyl group, an amine group, and an amide group. Among these, a carboxyl group having high reactivity with an epoxy group is preferred. However, from the viewpoint of preventing corrosion of the semiconductor wafer and the circuit of the semiconductor wafer, the reactive functional group is preferably a group other than the carboxyl group.

作為具有上述反應性官能基且不具有能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b),可列舉,例如,使至少具有上述反應性官能基的單體聚合而得者。當為丙烯酸系聚合物(b-1)時,已列舉作為構成此等的單體的上述丙烯酸系單體及非丙烯酸系單體的任一者或任兩者,只要使用具有上述反應性官能基者即可。作為具有作為反應性官能基的羥基的上述聚合物(b),可列舉,例如,將含羥基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯進行聚合而得者,此等以外,亦可列舉在先前所列舉的上述丙烯酸系單體或非丙烯酸系單體中,1個或2個以上的氫原子被上述反應性官能基取代而成的單體經由聚合而得者。Examples of the polymer (b) having the above-mentioned reactive functional group and not having an energy ray-curable group include, for example, those obtained by polymerizing monomers having at least the above-mentioned reactive functional group. In the case of the acrylic polymer (b-1), any or both of the above-mentioned acrylic monomers and non-acrylic monomers constituting these monomers have been cited as long as they have the above-mentioned reactive function The base can be. Examples of the above-mentioned polymer (b) having a hydroxyl group as a reactive functional group include, for example, those obtained by polymerizing hydroxyl-containing (meth)acrylates, and other than those listed above, Among the acrylic monomers or non-acrylic monomers, monomers in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with the reactive functional groups are obtained by polymerization.

在具有反應性官能基的上述聚合物(b)中,相對於構成此等的構成單元的全部量,由具有反應性官能基的單體衍生的構成單元的量的比率(含量),以1~20質量%為佳,以2~10質量%為更佳。藉由上述比率在如此範圍,在上述聚合物(b)中,交聯的程度成為更好的範圍。In the above-mentioned polymer (b) having a reactive functional group, the ratio (content) of the amount of structural units derived from the monomer having a reactive functional group relative to the total amount of the structural units constituting these is 1 ~20% by mass is better, and 2~10% by mass is even better. With the above ratio in such a range, the degree of crosslinking in the polymer (b) becomes a better range.

不具有能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b)的重量平均分子量(Mw),從組合物(IV-1)的造膜性變得更好的觀點而言,以10000~2000000為佳,以100000~1500000為更佳。在此,「重量平均分子量」,如先前所說明。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer (b) without an energy ray-curable group is preferably from 10,000 to 2,000,000 from the viewpoint that the film-forming property of the composition (IV-1) becomes better, and 100000~1500000 is better. Here, the "weight average molecular weight" is as previously described.

組合物(IV-1)及能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜所含有的不具有能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b),可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The polymer (b) contained in the composition (IV-1) and the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film, which does not have an energy ray-curable group, may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds, if it is two In the case of more than one species, these combinations and ratios can be arbitrarily selected.

作為組合物(IV-1),可列舉含有上述聚合物(a1)及上述化合物(a2)的任一者或兩者。然後,當組合物(IV-1)含有上述化合物(a2)時,以進一步含有不具有能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b)為佳,此時,以進一步含有上述(a1)為佳。此外,組合物(IV-1)亦可不含有上述化合物(a2),而同時含有上述聚合物(a1)及不具有能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b)。Examples of the composition (IV-1) include either or both of the polymer (a1) and the compound (a2). Then, when the composition (IV-1) contains the above-mentioned compound (a2), it is preferable to further contain the polymer (b) having no energy ray-curable group, and in this case, it is more preferable to further contain the above-mentioned (a1). In addition, the composition (IV-1) may not contain the above-mentioned compound (a2), but also contain the above-mentioned polymer (a1) and the polymer (b) having no energy ray-curable group.

組合物(IV-1)含有上述聚合物(a1)、上述化合物(a2)及不具有能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b)時,在組合物(IV-1)中,上述化合物(a2)的含量,相對於上述聚合物(a1)及不具有能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b)的總含量100質量份,以10~400質量份為佳,以30~350質量份為更佳。When the composition (IV-1) contains the polymer (a1), the compound (a2), and the polymer (b) having no energy ray-curable group, in the composition (IV-1), the compound (a2) ), with respect to the total content of the polymer (a1) and the polymer (b) without an energy ray-curable group (b) 100 parts by mass, preferably 10 to 400 parts by mass, more preferably 30 to 350 parts by mass good.

在組合物(IV-1)中,相對於溶媒以外的成分的總含量,上述能量線硬化性成分(a)及不具有能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b)的合計含量的比率(亦即,能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜的上述能量線硬化性成分(a)及不具有能量線硬化性基的聚合物(b)的合計含量),以5~90質量%為佳,以10~80質量%為更佳,以20~70質量%為特佳。藉由能量線硬化性成分的含量的上述比率在此等範圍,能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜的能量線硬化性變得更良好。In the composition (IV-1), the ratio of the total content of the energy ray-curable component (a) and the polymer (b) having no energy ray-curable group to the total content of components other than the solvent (also That is, the total content of the energy ray curable component (a) and the polymer (b) having no energy ray curable group in the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film) is preferably 5 to 90% by mass, and 10 to 80% by mass is better, and 20 to 70% by mass is particularly preferable. With the above ratio of the content of the energy ray-curable component being in these ranges, the energy ray-curability of the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film becomes better.

上述能量線硬化性成分以外,對應目的,組合物(IV-1)亦可含有選自熱硬化性成分、填充材、耦合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑所成群組的1種或2種以上。In addition to the above energy ray-curable components, the composition (IV-1) may contain a heat-curable component, a filler, a coupling agent, a cross-linking agent, a photopolymerization initiator, a colorant, and a general-purpose additive for the purpose One or more than one of the group.

例如,藉由使用含有上述能量線硬化性成分及熱硬化性成分的組合物(IV-1),所形成的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜,藉由加熱而提升對於被附著體的接著力,由此能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜所形成的保護膜的強度亦獲得提升。 此外,藉由使用含有上述能量線硬化性成分及著色劑的組合物(IV-1),所形成的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用膜,顯示與先前所說明的熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜含有著色劑(I)時,有相同效果。For example, by using the composition (IV-1) containing the above energy ray-curable component and thermosetting component, the formed energy ray-curable protective film forming film is heated to enhance the adhesion to the adherend As a result, the strength of the protective film formed by the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film is also improved. In addition, by using the composition (IV-1) containing the above energy ray-curable component and the coloring agent, the formed energy ray-curable protective film-forming film is shown to be the same as the thermal-curable protective film-forming method described previously. When the film contains a coloring agent (I), it has the same effect.

作為組合物(IV-1)中的上述熱硬化性成分、填充材、耦合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑,可列舉分別與在組合物(III-1)中的熱硬化性成分(B)、填充材(D)、耦合劑(E)、交聯劑(F)、光聚合起始劑(H)、著色劑(I)及泛用添加劑(J)相同者。Examples of the thermosetting component, filler, coupling agent, crosslinking agent, photopolymerization initiator, colorant, and general-purpose additive in the composition (IV-1) include the composition (III-1) ) In the thermosetting component (B), filler (D), coupling agent (E), crosslinking agent (F), photopolymerization initiator (H), colorant (I) and general additives (J ) The same.

在組合物(IV-1)中,上述熱硬化性成分、填充材、耦合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑,分別可單獨使用1種,亦可並用2種以上,若並用2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。In the composition (IV-1), the above-mentioned thermosetting component, filler, coupling agent, crosslinking agent, photopolymerization initiator, colorant and general-purpose additive may be used alone or in combination. When two or more kinds are used in combination, these combinations and ratios can be arbitrarily selected.

組合物(IV-1)中的上述熱硬化性成分、填充材、耦合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑的含量,只要對應目的而適當選擇即可,並無特別限定。The content of the above thermosetting component, filler, coupling agent, crosslinking agent, photopolymerization initiator, coloring agent and general-purpose additive in the composition (IV-1) may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, and No particular limitation.

從藉由稀釋而提升其操作性的觀點而言,組合物(IV-1)以進一步含有溶媒者為佳。 作為組合物(IV-1)所含有的溶媒,可列舉,例如,與上述組合物(III-1)中的溶媒相同者。 組合物(IV-1)所含有的溶媒,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上。From the viewpoint of improving the operability by dilution, it is preferable that the composition (IV-1) further contains a solvent. The solvent contained in the composition (IV-1) may, for example, be the same as the solvent in the above-mentioned composition (III-1). The solvent contained in the composition (IV-1) may be only one kind or two or more kinds.

>>能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組合物的製造方法>> 組合物(IV-1)等的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組合物,可藉由將用以構成此等的各成分調配而獲得。 各成分的調配時的添加順序並無特別限定,亦可同時添加2種以上的成分。 使用溶媒時,可將溶媒與溶媒以外的任一調配成分混合而預先稀釋此調配成分來使用,亦可不預先稀釋溶媒以外的任一調配成分而將溶媒與此等調配成分混合來使用。 調配時混合各成分的方法並無特別限定,使攪拌子或攪拌翼等旋轉而混合的方法;使用混合機的混合方法;施加超音波的混合方法等,從習知的方法適當選擇即可。 各成分的添加及混合時的溫度以及時間,只要各調配成分不會劣化,則無特別限定,適當調節即可,但溫度以15~30℃為佳。>>Method for manufacturing composition for forming energy ray curable protective film>> The composition for forming an energy ray-curable protective film such as the composition (IV-1) can be obtained by blending the components that constitute these. The order of addition during the preparation of each component is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added simultaneously. When a solvent is used, the solvent may be mixed with any formulation component other than the solvent to dilute the formulation component in advance, or may be used by mixing the solvent with these formulation components without diluting any formulation component other than the solvent in advance. The method of mixing the components at the time of preparation is not particularly limited, and the method of rotating and mixing the stirrer, the stirring blade, etc.; the mixing method using a mixer; the mixing method using ultrasonic waves, etc., may be appropriately selected from known methods. The temperature and time at the time of addition and mixing of each component are not particularly limited as long as each formulated component does not deteriorate, and may be adjusted appropriately, but the temperature is preferably 15 to 30°C.

○非硬化性保護膜形成用膜 雖然上述非硬化性保護膜形成用膜未顯示硬化造成的特性的變化,在本發明中,在已將其貼附在半導體晶圓的上述背面等作為標的處的階段,視為已形成保護膜。○Non-curable protective film forming film Although the film for forming a non-curable protective film does not show a change in characteristics due to curing, in the present invention, it is considered that a protective film has been formed at a stage where it has been attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer or the like as a target .

作為較佳的非硬化性保護膜形成用膜,可列舉,例如,含有熱可塑性樹脂者。Examples of preferred films for forming a non-curable protective film include, for example, those containing thermoplastic resins.

>非硬化性保護膜形成用組合物(V-1)> 作為非硬化性保護膜形成用組合物,可列舉,例如,含有上述熱可塑性樹脂的非硬化性保護膜形成用組合物(V-1)(在本說明書中,有時簡稱為「組合物(V-1)」)等。>Composition for forming non-curing protective film (V-1)> Examples of the composition for forming a non-curable protective film include, for example, a composition (V-1) for forming a non-curable protective film containing the above-mentioned thermoplastic resin (in this specification, it is sometimes simply referred to as "composition ( V-1)") etc.

[熱可塑性樹脂] 上述熱可塑性樹脂並無特別限定。 作為上述熱可塑性樹脂,更具體而言,可列舉,例如,與作為上述組合物(III-1)的含有成分所列舉的丙烯酸系樹脂、聚酯、聚氨酯、苯氧基樹脂、聚丁烯、聚丁二烯、聚苯乙烯等的非硬化性的樹脂相同者。[Thermoplastic resin] The thermoplastic resin is not particularly limited. As the thermoplastic resin, more specifically, for example, acrylic resins, polyesters, polyurethanes, phenoxy resins, polybutene, and acrylic resins listed as the components of the composition (III-1), Non-curable resins such as polybutadiene and polystyrene are the same.

組合物(V-1)及非硬化性保護膜形成用膜所含有的上述熱可塑性樹脂,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上,若為2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。The above-mentioned thermoplastic resin contained in the composition (V-1) and the film for forming a non-curable protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, these may be arbitrarily selected Combination and ratio.

在組合物(V-1)中,相對於溶媒以外的成分的總含量,上述熱可塑性樹脂的含量的比率(亦即,非硬化性保護膜形成用膜的上述熱可塑性樹脂的含量),以5~90質量%為佳,例如,可以是10~80質量%及20~70質量%等的任一者。In the composition (V-1), the ratio of the content of the thermoplastic resin relative to the total content of the components other than the solvent (that is, the content of the thermoplastic resin in the film for forming a non-curable protective film), It is preferably 5 to 90% by mass. For example, it may be any of 10 to 80% by mass and 20 to 70% by mass.

上述熱可塑性樹脂以外,對應目的,組合物(V-1)亦可含有1種或2種以上選自由填充材、耦合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑所成群組。In addition to the above thermoplastic resins, the composition (V-1) may contain one or more types selected from the group consisting of fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, colorants, and general-purpose additives, depending on the purpose.

例如,藉由使用含有上述熱可塑性樹脂及著色劑的組合物(V-1),所形成的非硬化性保護膜形成用膜,顯示與先前所說明的熱硬化性保護膜形成用膜含有著色劑(I)時相同的效果。For example, by using the composition (V-1) containing the above thermoplastic resin and coloring agent, the formed film for forming a non-curable protective film shows that the film for forming a thermosetting protective film described above contains coloring The same effect as the agent (I).

作為組合物(V-1)中的上述填充材、耦合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑,可列舉分別與在組合物(III-1)中的填充材(D)、耦合劑(E)、交聯劑(F)、著色劑(I)及泛用添加劑(J)相同者。Examples of the filler, coupling agent, crosslinking agent, colorant, and general-purpose additives in the composition (V-1) include the filler (D) and coupling agent in the composition (III-1), respectively. (E), the crosslinking agent (F), the coloring agent (I), and the universal additive (J) are the same.

在組合物(V-1)中,上述填充材、耦合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑,分別可單獨使用1種,亦可並用2種以上,當並用2種以上時,可任意選擇此等的組合及比率。In the composition (V-1), the filler, coupling agent, crosslinking agent, colorant and general-purpose additive may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more are used in combination, Arbitrarily choose these combinations and ratios.

組合物(V-1)中的上述填充材、耦合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及泛用添加劑的含量,只要對應目的而適當選擇即可,並無特別限定。The content of the filler, coupling agent, crosslinking agent, colorant, and general-purpose additive in the composition (V-1) may be appropriately selected according to the purpose, and is not particularly limited.

從藉由稀釋而提升其操作性的觀點而言,組合物(V-1)以進一步含有溶媒為佳。 作為組合物(V-1)所含有的溶媒,可列舉,例如,與上述組合物(III-1)中的溶媒相同者。 組合物(V-1)所含有的溶媒,可僅為1種,亦可為2種以上。From the viewpoint of improving the operability by dilution, it is preferable that the composition (V-1) further contains a solvent. Examples of the solvent contained in the composition (V-1) include the same as the solvent in the above-mentioned composition (III-1). The solvent contained in the composition (V-1) may be only one kind or two or more kinds.

>>非硬化性保護膜形成用組合物的製造方法>> 組合物(V-1)等的非硬化性保護膜形成用組合物,可藉由將用以構成此等的各成分調配而獲得。 各成分的調配時的添加順序並無特別限定,亦可同時添加2種以上的成分。 使用溶媒時,可將溶媒與溶媒以外的任一調配成分混合而預先稀釋此調配成分來使用,亦可不預先稀釋溶媒以外的任一調配成分而將溶媒與此等調配成分混合來使用。 調配時混合各成分的方法並無特別限定,使攪拌子或攪拌翼等旋轉而混合的方法;使用混合機的混合方法;施加超音波的混合方法等,從習知的方法適當選擇即可。 各成分的添加及混合時的溫度以及時間,只要各調配成分不會劣化,則無特別限定,適當調節即可,但溫度以15~30℃為佳。>>Manufacturing method of non-curing protective film forming composition>> The composition for forming a non-curable protective film such as the composition (V-1) can be obtained by blending the components used to constitute these. The order of addition during the preparation of each component is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added simultaneously. When a solvent is used, the solvent may be mixed with any formulation component other than the solvent to dilute the formulation component in advance, or may be used by mixing the solvent with these formulation components without diluting any formulation component other than the solvent in advance. The method of mixing the components at the time of preparation is not particularly limited, and the method of rotating and mixing the stirrer, the stirring blade, etc.; the mixing method using a mixer; the mixing method using ultrasonic waves, etc., may be appropriately selected from known methods. The temperature and time at the time of addition and mixing of each component are not particularly limited as long as each formulated component does not deteriorate, and may be adjusted appropriately, but the temperature is preferably 15 to 30°C.

◎其他層 上述支撐片,在無損本發明效果的範圍內,基材及黏著劑層以外,亦可包括上述中間層等的其他層。 此外,上述保護膜形成用複合片,在無損本發明效果的範圍內,基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用膜以外,亦可包括其他層,此時的上述其他層,可以是包括支撐片的上述其他層,亦可未與支撐片直接接觸而配置。 上述其他層,對應目的可任意選擇,其種類並無特別限定。◎Other layers The support sheet may include other layers such as the intermediate layer in addition to the base material and the adhesive layer as long as the effect of the present invention is not impaired. In addition, the composite sheet for forming a protective film may include other layers in addition to the base material, the adhesive layer, and the film for forming a protective film as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired, and the other layers in this case may include a support The other layers of the sheet may be arranged without directly contacting the support sheet. The other layers mentioned above can be arbitrarily selected according to the purpose, and the types are not particularly limited.

作為上述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的一實施形態,可列舉,例如,黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性,黏著劑層至少含有具有來自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合物、交聯劑,在黏著劑層中,相對於上述丙烯酸系聚合物的含量100質量份,交聯劑的含量為0.3~50質量份,且,基材的第一面的上述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)為0.01~8μm者。As an embodiment of the composite sheet for forming the support sheet and the protective film, for example, the adhesive layer is non-energy ray-curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate. In the adhesive layer, the acrylic polymer and the crosslinking agent have a crosslinking agent content of 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the acrylic polymer, and the first side of the substrate The maximum height roughness (Rz) is 0.01 to 8 μm.

作為上述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的一實施形態,可列舉,例如,黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性,黏著劑層至少含有具有來自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合物、交聯劑,在黏著劑層中,相對於上述丙烯酸系聚合物的含量100質量份,交聯劑的含量為0.3~50質量份,上述丙烯酸系聚合物具有烷基的碳數為4以上的來自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的構成單元、來自含羥基的單體的構成單元,且,基材的第一面的上述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)為0.01~8μm。As an embodiment of the composite sheet for forming the support sheet and the protective film, for example, the adhesive layer is non-energy ray-curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate. In the adhesive layer, the acrylic polymer and the crosslinking agent have a crosslinking agent content of 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the acrylic polymer, and the acrylic polymer has an alkyl group A structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate having a carbon number of 4 or more and a structural unit derived from a monomer containing a hydroxyl group, and the maximum height roughness (Rz) of the first surface of the base material is 0.01 to 8 μm .

作為上述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的一實施形態,可列舉,例如,黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性,黏著劑層至少含有具有來自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合物、交聯劑,在黏著劑層中,相對於上述丙烯酸系聚合物的含量100質量份,交聯劑的含量為0.3~50質量份,上述丙烯酸系聚合物具有烷基的碳數為4以上的來自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的構成單元、來自含羥基的單體的構成單元,在上述丙烯酸系聚合物中,來自含羥基的單體的構成單元的含量,相對於構成單元的全部量,為1~35質量%,且,基材的第一面的上述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)為0.01~8μm。As an embodiment of the composite sheet for forming the support sheet and the protective film, for example, the adhesive layer is non-energy ray-curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate. In the adhesive layer, the acrylic polymer and the crosslinking agent have a crosslinking agent content of 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the acrylic polymer, and the acrylic polymer has an alkyl group Structural units derived from alkyl (meth)acrylates and structural units derived from hydroxyl-containing monomers having a carbon number of 4 or more. In the acrylic polymer, the content of structural units derived from hydroxyl-containing monomers is relatively The total amount of the constituent units is 1 to 35% by mass, and the maximum height roughness (Rz) of the first surface of the base material is 0.01 to 8 μm.

作為上述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的一實施形態,可列舉,例如,黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性,黏著劑層至少含有具有來自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合物、交聯劑,在黏著劑層中,相對於上述丙烯酸系聚合物的含量100質量份,交聯劑的含量為0.3~50質量份,上述丙烯酸系聚合物具有烷基的碳數為4以上的來自(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的構成單元、來自含羥基的單體的構成單元,在上述丙烯酸系聚合物中,來自含羥基的單體的構成單元的含量,相對於構成單元的全部量,為1~35質量%,上述交聯劑為異氰酸酯系交聯劑,且,基材的第一面的上述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)為0.01~8μm。As an embodiment of the composite sheet for forming the support sheet and the protective film, for example, the adhesive layer is non-energy ray-curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate. In the adhesive layer, the acrylic polymer and the crosslinking agent have a crosslinking agent content of 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the acrylic polymer, and the acrylic polymer has an alkyl group Structural units derived from alkyl (meth)acrylates and structural units derived from hydroxyl-containing monomers having a carbon number of 4 or more. In the acrylic polymer, the content of structural units derived from hydroxyl-containing monomers is relatively The total amount of the constituent units is 1 to 35% by mass, the crosslinking agent is an isocyanate-based crosslinking agent, and the maximum height roughness (Rz) of the first surface of the substrate is 0.01 to 8 μm.

◇保護膜形成用複合片的製造方法 上述保護膜形成用複合片,例如,可藉有具有製作將基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用膜依此順序,在其厚度方向予以積層而構成的積層片的步驟(在本說明書中,有時稱為「積層片製作步驟(1)」),將此上述積層片在其厚度方向加壓同時保存的步驟(在本說明書中,有時稱為「積層片保存步驟」)的製造方法(在本說明書中,有時稱為「製造方法(S1)」)而製造。 各層(基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用膜)的形成方法,如先前所說明。 以下,關於上述製造方法(S1),對各步驟一一更詳細地說明。◇Manufacturing method of composite sheet for forming protective film The above-mentioned composite film for forming a protective film may have, for example, a step of producing a laminated sheet formed by laminating a substrate, an adhesive layer and a film for forming a protective film in this order (in this specification) , Sometimes referred to as "lamination sheet manufacturing step (1)"), manufacturing the step of pressing and storing the above laminate sheet in its thickness direction (in this specification, it is sometimes referred to as "lamination sheet preservation step") Method (sometimes referred to as "manufacturing method (S1)" in this specification). The formation method of each layer (base material, adhesive layer, and protective film forming film) is as previously explained. Hereinafter, the above-described manufacturing method (S1) will be described in more detail for each step.

◎製造方法(S1) >>積層片製作步驟(1)>> 在上述積層片製作步驟(1)中,製作將基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用膜依此順序,在其厚度方向予以積層而構成的積層片。 在本步驟中,例如,藉由以成為對應上述各層(基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用膜等)的位置關係的方式進行積層,製作與作為目標的保護膜形成用複合片具有相同積層構造的積層片。 且,在本說明書中,所謂「積層片」,若無特別說明,是指如上述,與作為目標的保護膜形成用複合片具有相同積層構造,且,未進行上述積層片保存步驟者。◎Manufacturing method (S1) >>Procedures for production of laminates (1)>> In the above-mentioned laminated sheet production step (1), a laminated sheet is produced in which the base material, the adhesive layer, and the film for forming a protective film are laminated in this order in the thickness direction. In this step, for example, by laminating so as to correspond to the positional relationship of the above layers (base material, adhesive layer, protective film forming film, etc.), the same as the target composite film forming protective film Laminated slices of laminated structure. In addition, in this specification, the "lamination sheet", unless otherwise specified, means a person having the same lamination structure as the above-mentioned composite sheet for forming a protective film, and has not performed the lamination sheet preservation step.

例如,製造支撐片時,在基材上積層黏著劑層時,在基材上塗佈上述黏著劑組合物,視需要使其乾燥即可。For example, when manufacturing the support sheet, when the adhesive layer is laminated on the substrate, the adhesive composition may be coated on the substrate and dried as necessary.

另一方面,例如,於在基材上積層完畢的黏著劑層上,進一步積層保護膜形成用膜時,可在黏著劑層上塗佈保護膜形成用組合物,直接形成保護膜形成用膜。保護膜形成用膜以外的層,亦可使用用以形成此層的組合物,藉由相同的方法,在黏著劑層上積層此層。如此一來,使用任一組合物而形成連續2層的積層構造時,可在由上述組合物所形成的層上,進一步塗佈組合物而形成新的層。但是,以藉由將此2層中的後積層的層,先在另外的剝離膜上使用上述組合物預先形成,將與此形成完畢的層的與上述剝離膜接觸側相反側的露出面,與已經形成完成的剩下的層的露出面貼合,而形成連續2層的積層構造為佳。此時,上述組合物,以塗佈在剝離膜的剝離處理面為佳。剝離膜在積層構造形成後,視需要而去除即可。On the other hand, for example, when a film for forming a protective film is further laminated on the adhesive layer that has been laminated on the base material, the composition for forming a protective film may be coated on the adhesive layer to directly form the film for forming a protective film . For a layer other than the film for forming a protective film, a composition for forming this layer can also be used, and this layer is laminated on the adhesive layer by the same method. In this way, when any one of the compositions is used to form a continuous two-layer build-up structure, a new layer can be formed by further applying the composition on the layer formed from the above composition. However, by forming the post-stacked layer of these two layers, the pre-formed composition is preliminarily formed on another release film, and the exposed surface of the layer formed thereon opposite to the side in contact with the release film, It is preferable to bond with the exposed surface of the remaining layer that has been formed, and to form a stacked structure of two consecutive layers. At this time, the above composition is preferably applied to the peeling treatment surface of the peeling film. After the release film is formed, it can be removed as needed.

例如,當製造在基材上積層黏著劑層、在上述黏著劑層上積層保護膜形成用膜而成的保護膜形成用複合片(支撐片為基材及黏著劑層的積層物的保護膜形成用複合片)時,藉由在基材上塗佈黏著劑組合物,視需要使其乾燥,在基材上積層黏著劑層;另外,藉由在剝離膜上塗佈保護膜形成用組合物,視需要使其乾燥,在剝離膜上形成保護膜形成用膜。然後,藉由將此保護膜形成用膜的露出面,與在基材上積層完成的黏著劑層的露出面貼合,將保護膜形成用膜積層在黏著劑層上,而獲得上述積層片。For example, when manufacturing a composite film for forming a protective film formed by laminating an adhesive layer on a substrate and laminating a protective film forming film on the adhesive layer (the support sheet is a protective film of a laminate of a substrate and an adhesive layer) When forming a composite sheet), by applying the adhesive composition on the base material, drying it if necessary, and stacking the adhesive layer on the base material; in addition, by applying a protective film forming combination on the release film If necessary, it is dried, and a film for forming a protective film is formed on the release film. Then, by bonding the exposed surface of the protective film forming film to the exposed surface of the adhesive layer laminated on the substrate, the protective film forming film is laminated on the adhesive layer to obtain the above-mentioned laminated sheet .

另外,在基材上積層黏著劑層時,如上述,取代在基材上塗佈黏著劑組合物的方法,亦可藉由在剝離膜上塗佈黏著劑組合物,視需要使其乾燥,在剝離膜上形成黏著劑層,將此層的露出面與基材一側的表面貼合,藉此將黏著劑層積層在基材上。 在任一方法,皆可將剝離膜在形成作為目標的積層構造後的任意時間點予以去除。In addition, when laminating the adhesive layer on the substrate, as described above, instead of applying the adhesive composition on the substrate, the adhesive composition may be applied on the release film and dried if necessary. An adhesive layer is formed on the release film, and the exposed surface of this layer is bonded to the surface on the side of the substrate, thereby laminating the adhesive on the substrate. In either method, the release film can be removed at any time after the formation of the target laminate structure.

如此一來,任何構成保護膜形成用複合片的基材以外的層,皆可藉由預先形成在剝離膜上,貼合在作為目標的層的表面的方法而積層,因此可視需要適當選擇採用此類步驟的層,而製造上述積層片。In this way, any layer other than the base material constituting the composite sheet for forming a protective film can be laminated by a method previously formed on the release film and bonded to the surface of the target layer, so it can be appropriately selected and adopted as necessary Such steps are used to manufacture the above laminates.

例如,保護膜形成用複合片,通常,藉由在與其支撐片相反側的最表層(例如,保護膜形成用膜)的表面貼合剝離膜的狀態進行保存。因此,藉由在此剝離膜(較佳為其剝離處理面)上,塗佈保護膜形成用組合物等的用以形成構成最表層的層的組合物,視需要使其乾燥,在剝離膜上形成構成最表層的層,在與此層的與剝離膜接觸側相反側的露出面上,將剩下的各層以上述任一方法積層,剝離膜在不去除維持貼合的狀態,獲得上述積層片。For example, the composite sheet for forming a protective film is usually stored by bonding the release film to the surface of the outermost layer (for example, the film for forming a protective film) on the side opposite to the support sheet. Therefore, by applying a composition for forming the outermost layer, such as a composition for forming a protective film, on this release film (preferably its release-treated surface), it is dried as necessary, and the release film Form the topmost layer, and on the exposed surface of the layer opposite to the side in contact with the release film, the remaining layers are laminated by any of the above methods. The release film is maintained in a bonded state without removal to obtain the above Laminate.

當保護膜形成用複合片包括上述其他層時,在上述積層片製作步驟(1)的適當時間點,以成為適當配置位置的方式,適當追加設置上述其他層的步驟而進行即可。When the composite sheet for forming a protective film includes the above-mentioned other layer, the step of providing the above-mentioned other layer may be appropriately performed at an appropriate point in time in the step (1) of producing the laminated sheet so as to be an appropriate arrangement position.

在積層片製作步驟(1)中所製作的上述積層片的形狀,並無特別限定。例如,可以製作適合用來捲取為輥狀的長條的積層片,但亦可製作非長條的其他形狀的積層片。The shape of the laminate sheet produced in the laminate sheet production step (1) is not particularly limited. For example, it is possible to produce a long lamination sheet suitable for winding in a roll shape, but it is also possible to produce a lamination sheet of other shapes that are not elongated.

>>積層片保存步驟>> 在上述積層片保存步驟中,將上述積層片在其厚度方向加壓同時保存。 在本步驟中,作為加壓上述積層片並保存的方法,可列舉,例如,將長條的上述積層片捲取為輥狀,將此經捲取的積層片,以此狀態,藉由捲取所產生的壓力,加壓積層片的單面或雙面並保存的方法;未將長條的上述積層片捲取成為輥狀,在展開狀態的積層片,或是,在非長條的上述積層片的單面或雙面,施加壓力並保存的方法等。>>Steps to save the laminated film>> In the lamination sheet storage step, the lamination sheet is pressed while being stored in its thickness direction. In this step, as a method of pressing and storing the laminate sheet, for example, a long strip of the laminate sheet is wound into a roll shape, and the wound laminate sheet is rolled in this state by rolling Take the generated pressure, pressurize one side or both sides of the laminate and store it; the roll of the above laminate is not rolled into a roll, the laminate in the unfolded state, or, in the non-strip One or both sides of the above-mentioned laminated sheet, a method of applying pressure and storing, etc.

長條積層片捲取為輥狀時,積層片,以在其長邊方向捲取為佳。 捲取積層片時,例如,以捲取張力150~170N/m為佳,以捲取速度45~55m/min為佳,捲取張力的推拔比(衰減率)以85~95%為佳,藉由採用此等捲取條件,能夠以更適當的壓力加壓保存積層片。此等捲取條件,對於例如,厚度為100~300μm、寬度為300~500mm、長度為40~60m的積層片特別適用,但積層片的大小並不限於此。When the long laminated sheet is wound in a roll shape, the laminated sheet is preferably wound in the longitudinal direction. When winding the laminate, for example, a winding tension of 150 to 170 N/m is preferred, a winding speed of 45 to 55 m/min is preferred, and the pull-out ratio (attenuation rate) of the winding tension is preferably 85 to 95% By using these winding conditions, the laminated sheet can be stored under pressure at a more appropriate pressure. These winding conditions are particularly suitable for, for example, a laminate having a thickness of 100 to 300 μm, a width of 300 to 500 mm, and a length of 40 to 60 m, but the size of the laminate is not limited to this.

積層片,例如,可在常溫下或室溫下捲取,亦可如下述,在與加熱加壓保存捲取的積層片時相同的溫度條件下捲取。The laminated sheet may be wound at normal temperature or room temperature, for example, or may be wound under the same temperature conditions as when the wound laminated sheet is stored under heat and pressure as described below.

捲取成輥狀的積層片可保存在常溫下或室溫下,但以加熱並保存為佳。藉由此加熱加壓保存,可獲得黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜間的積層性、保護膜或保護膜形成用膜的隔著支撐片的印字辨識性更佳的保護膜形成用複合片。The laminated sheet wound into a roll shape can be stored at room temperature or room temperature, but it is preferably heated and stored. By heating and pressurizing storage, a laminate sheet for protective film formation with better legibility of a protective film or a protective film or a film for protective film formation via a support sheet can be obtained by laminating between the adhesive layer and the protective film forming film .

已將積層片捲取為輥狀時,保存時的加熱溫度並無特別限定,但以53~75℃為佳,以55~70℃為更佳,以57~65℃為特佳。When the laminated sheet is wound into a roll shape, the heating temperature during storage is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 53 to 75°C, more preferably 55 to 70°C, and particularly preferably 57 to 65°C.

已將積層片捲取為輥狀時的保存時間,並無特別限定,但以24~720小時(1~30日)為佳,以48~480小時(2~20日)為更佳,以72~240小時(3~10日)為特佳。The storage time when the laminated sheet has been wound into a roll is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 24 to 720 hours (1 to 30 days), and more preferably 48 to 480 hours (2 to 20 days). 72~240 hours (3~10 days) is especially good.

捲取成輥狀的積層片,亦可例如,將保護膜形成用膜及支撐片加工成特定的形狀,將經過如此加工的支撐片及保護膜形成用膜的複數片的積層物,在其保護膜形成用膜側,貼合在長條的剝離膜,同時在此剝離膜的長邊方向排列而配置。此時的保護膜形成用膜,以具有與半導體晶圓相同或幾乎相同的平面形狀(通常為圓形)者為佳。此外,此時的支撐片以具有與切割裝置中的用以固定支撐片的治具相同或幾乎相同的外周形狀者為佳。此外,此時,剝離膜的上述積層物的貼合面當中,以在短邊方向的周圍部分附近不重疊上述積層物的方式,設置成帶狀的片材為佳。此片材為用以當將積層片捲取成輥狀時,抑制在上述積層物的表面上的階差(在本說明書中,有時稱為「積層痕」)的發生。上述積層痕,起因於在積層片的輥中,上述積層物(經過加工的支撐片及保護膜形成用膜的積層物)的積層位置在輥的徑方向不一致,而在上述積層物的表面施予高壓力而產生。若將上述片材設置在上述周圍部分附近,在上述積層物的表面,不會施予如此高的壓力,而抑制上述積層痕的發生。The laminated sheet wound into a roll shape may, for example, process a film for forming a protective film and a support sheet into a specific shape, and a plurality of laminates of the film for forming the supporting sheet and the protective film thus processed may be On the film side for forming a protective film, a long release film is bonded, and the release film is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the release film. In this case, the film for forming a protective film is preferably one having the same or almost the same planar shape (usually circular) as the semiconductor wafer. In addition, it is preferable that the support piece at this time has the same or almost the same outer peripheral shape as the jig for fixing the support piece in the cutting device. In addition, in this case, it is preferable to provide a strip-shaped sheet so that the laminate surface of the release film does not overlap the laminate in the vicinity of the peripheral portion in the short-side direction. This sheet is used to suppress the occurrence of a level difference (sometimes referred to as a "lamination mark" in the present specification) on the surface of the laminate when the laminate sheet is wound into a roll shape. The above-mentioned lamination marks are due to the fact that in the roller of the lamination sheet, the lamination position of the lamination object (the lamination object of the processed support sheet and the film for forming a protective film) does not match in the radial direction of the roller and is applied on the surface of the lamination object Produced under high pressure. If the sheet is provided in the vicinity of the peripheral portion, such a high pressure is not applied to the surface of the laminate, and the occurrence of the laminate mark is suppressed.

長條的積層片沒有捲取成輥狀而成為展開狀態時,以及積層片為非長條時,以將複數片的此等積層片進一步積層而保存為佳。然後,像這樣積層積層片時,以複數片的此等積層片的方向及周圍部分的位置成為彼此對準的狀態為佳。When the long laminated sheet is not wound into a roll shape and is in an unfolded state, and when the laminated sheet is a non-long sheet, it is preferable to further store and store a plurality of these laminated sheets. Then, when laminating the lamination sheets in this way, it is preferable that the directions of the plurality of lamination sheets and the positions of the surrounding parts are aligned with each other.

非長條積層片(換言之,單張的積層片)的形狀及大小,並無特別限定。例如,以適用於使用切割裝置而加工1片的半導體晶圓的方式,配合半導體晶圓的形狀及大小及用以固定切割裝置中的支撐片的治具的形狀及大小,調節積層片的形狀及大小為佳。The shape and size of the non-strip laminate (in other words, a single laminate) are not particularly limited. For example, in a manner suitable for processing one semiconductor wafer using a dicing device, adjust the shape of the lamination sheet according to the shape and size of the semiconductor wafer and the shape and size of the jig for fixing the support piece in the dicing device And the size is better.

積層狀態的上述積層片,可在常溫下或室溫下保存,以加熱同時保存為佳。藉由此類的加熱加壓保存,可獲得黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜間的積層性、保護膜或保護膜形成用膜的隔著支撐片的印字辨識性更佳的保護膜形成用複合片。 再者,加壓保存積層狀態的上述積層片時,加熱溫度及保存時間的任一者,可與上述積層片捲取為輥狀時相同。The above-mentioned laminated sheet in a layered state can be stored at normal temperature or room temperature, preferably at the same time when heated. By such heat and pressure preservation, it is possible to obtain a laminate film between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film, and a protective film for forming a protective film with better legibility of the protective film or the film for forming the protective film through the support sheet Composite sheet. In addition, when the laminated sheet in the laminated state is stored under pressure, any one of the heating temperature and the storage time may be the same as when the laminated sheet is wound in a roll shape.

在製造方法(S1)中,積層片保存步驟結束後,藉由解除積層片的加壓及視需要的加熱,可獲得作為目標的保護膜形成用複合片。In the manufacturing method (S1), after the lamination sheet storage step is completed, by releasing the pressurization of the laminate sheet and optionally heating, a target composite film for forming a protective film can be obtained.

在製造方法(S1)的積層片製作步驟(1)中,基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用膜的積層(貼合)的順序並無特別限定,但預先製作支撐片(在基材上預先積層黏著劑層)、預先製作保護膜形成用膜、在支撐片上積層保護膜形成用膜時,亦可將支撐片及保護膜形成用膜的任一者或兩者,單獨地,在將其積層之前,藉由與上述積層片時相同方法進行加壓保存。藉由將積層之前的支撐片單獨地加壓保存,可更有效地抑制基材與黏著劑層之間的上述非貼合區域的發生。此外,藉由將積層之前的保護膜形成用膜單獨地加壓保存,使保護膜形成用膜及保護膜的黏著劑層側的面(第二面)的凹凸度變小(平滑度變大),提升保護膜形成用膜及保護膜的設計性。In the manufacturing method (S1) of the laminated sheet manufacturing step (1), the order of lamination (lamination) of the substrate, the adhesive layer, and the protective film forming film is not particularly limited, but the support sheet (on the substrate) is prepared in advance Pre-laminate an adhesive layer), prepare a film for forming a protective film in advance, and deposit a film for forming a protective film on a supporting sheet, either or both of the supporting sheet and the film for forming a protective film may be used separately. Before stacking, it was stored under pressure by the same method as the above-mentioned stacking sheet. By separately storing the supporting sheet before lamination under pressure, the occurrence of the above-mentioned non-bonding area between the base material and the adhesive layer can be more effectively suppressed. In addition, by separately storing the protective film forming film before lamination under pressure, the unevenness of the surface (second surface) of the protective film forming film and the adhesive layer side of the protective film becomes smaller (the smoothness becomes larger) ) To improve the design of the protective film forming film and protective film.

亦即,上述保護膜形成用複合片,亦可藉由例如具有下列步驟的製造方法(在本說明書中,有時稱為「製造方法(S2)」)而製造:藉由在積層有基材及黏著劑層的支撐片的上述黏著劑層上,積層保護膜形成用膜,將基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用膜依此順序,在其厚度方向積層而構成的積層片的製作步驟(在本說明書中,有時稱為「積層片製作步驟(2)」);將上述積層片在其厚度方向加壓同時保存的步驟(保存步驟);進一步具有在上述積層片製作步驟(2)前,將上述支撐片及保護膜形成用膜的任一者或兩者,在其厚度方向加壓同時保存的步驟(在本說明書中,保存支撐片的步驟,稱為「支撐片保存步驟」,保存保護膜形成用膜的步驟,稱為「保護膜形成用膜保存步驟」)。That is, the above-mentioned composite film for forming a protective film can also be manufactured by, for example, a manufacturing method having the following steps (in this specification, it is sometimes referred to as "manufacturing method (S2)"): by having a substrate in the laminate And the above-mentioned adhesive layer of the supporting sheet of the adhesive layer, a film for forming a protective film is laminated, and a substrate, an adhesive layer and a film for forming a protective film are laminated in this order in the thickness direction to produce a laminated sheet Step (in this specification, it is sometimes referred to as "layered sheet manufacturing step (2)"); step of pressing and storing the above layered sheet in its thickness direction (storage step); further having the above layered sheet manufacturing step ( 2) Before, either or both of the above-mentioned support sheet and the film for forming a protective film are pressed while being stored in the thickness direction (in this specification, the step of storing the support sheet is called "support sheet storage" "Step", a step of storing the film for forming a protective film, is called "a film storing step for forming a protective film").

◎製造方法(S2) 上述製造方法(S2),進行積層片製作步驟(2) 來作為上述積層片製作步驟(1),再者,除了追加進行上述支撐片保存步驟及保護膜形成用膜保存步驟的任一者或兩者的差異點以外,其餘與上述的製造方法(S1)相同。◎Manufacturing method (S2) In the above manufacturing method (S2), the lamination sheet production step (2) is performed as the lamination sheet production step (1), and besides, either one of the above support sheet storage step and the protective film formation film storage step or Except for the difference between the two, the rest is the same as the above-mentioned manufacturing method (S1).

>>積層片製作步驟(2)>> 上述積層片製作步驟(2),如上述,除了為了預先製作支撐片、預先製作保護膜形成用膜、在支撐片上積層保護膜形成用膜,而限定各層的積層順序以外,其餘與製造方法(S1)中的積層片製作步驟(1)相同。>>Procedures for production of laminates (2)>> The above-mentioned lamination sheet manufacturing step (2), as described above, except that the order of lamination of each layer is limited in order to prepare the support sheet in advance, the film for forming the protective film, and the film for forming the protective film on the support sheet, the rest is the same as the manufacturing method ( The production step (1) of the laminated sheet in S1) is the same.

>>支撐片保存步驟、保護膜形成用膜保存步驟>> 上述支撐片保存步驟及保護膜形成用膜保存步驟,各自除了保存對象物不是積層片而是支撐片或保護膜形成用膜的差異點以外,其餘可與製造方法(S1)中的積層片保存步驟同樣地進行。 此時,例如,支撐片及保護膜形成用膜的保存時間,與積層片時相同,可以是24~720小時(1~30日)、48~480小時(2~20日)及72~240小時(3~10日)的任一者。>>Protection step of supporting sheet, preservation step of protective film formation film>> The above support sheet storage step and protective film formation film storage step can be stored in the same way as the laminate in the manufacturing method (S1) except that the object to be stored is not a laminate sheet but a difference between the support sheet or the protective film formation membrane. The procedure is the same. At this time, for example, the storage time of the support sheet and the protective film forming film is the same as that of the laminated sheet, and it can be 24 to 720 hours (1 to 30 days), 48 to 480 hours (2 to 20 days), and 72 to 240 Any one of the hours (3~10 days).

另一方面,上述支撐片保存步驟及保護膜形成用膜保存步驟,分別如同上述變更保存對象物之外,進一步變更保存對象物(支撐片或保護膜形成用膜)的保存時間,除了此等變更點以外,其餘可與製造方法(S1)中的積層片保存步驟同樣地進行。 此時,例如,支撐片及保護膜形成用膜的保存時間,可以是12~720小時(0.5~30日)、12~480小時(0.5~20日)及12~240小時(0.5~10日)的任一者。但是,這僅為上述保存時間的一例。 [實施例]On the other hand, the above-mentioned support sheet storage step and protective film formation film storage step are the same as the above-mentioned change of the storage object, and the storage time of the storage object (support sheet or protective film forming film) is further changed, among others Other than the change point, the rest can be carried out in the same manner as in the lamination sheet storage step in the manufacturing method (S1). At this time, for example, the storage time of the support sheet and the protective film forming film may be 12 to 720 hours (0.5 to 30 days), 12 to 480 hours (0.5 to 20 days), and 12 to 240 hours (0.5 to 10 days) ). However, this is only an example of the above storage time. [Example]

以下,藉由具體的實施例,針對本發明更詳細說明。但是,本發明並不限於以下所示的實施例。Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in more detail with specific examples. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments shown below.

>保護膜形成用組合物的製造原料> 保護膜形成用組合物的製造中使用的原料如以下所示。 ‧聚合物成分(A) (A)-1:將丙烯酸甲酯(85質量份)及丙烯酸2-羥乙酯(15質量份)共聚合而成的丙烯酸系聚合物(重量平均分子量370000,玻璃轉換溫度6℃) ‧熱硬化性成分(B1) (B1)-1:雙酚A型環氧樹脂(三菱化學公司製「jER828」,環氧當量184~194g/eq) (B1)-2:雙酚A型環氧樹脂(三菱化學公司製「jER1055」,環氧當量800~900g/eq) (B1)-3:二環戊二烯型環氧樹脂(DIG公司製「EPICLON HP-7200HH」,環氧當量255~260g/eq) •熱硬化劑(B2) (B2)-1:二氰二胺(dicyandiamide)(ADEKA公司製「ADK HARDENER EH-3636AS」,熱活性潛在性環氧樹脂硬化劑,活性氫量21g/eq) ‧硬化促進劑(C) (C)-1:2-苯基-4,5-二羥甲基咪唑(四國化成工業公司製「CUREZOL 2PHZ-PW」) •填充劑(D) (D)-1:氧化矽填充劑(ADMATECHS公司製「SC2050MA」,被環氧系化合物表面修飾的氧化矽填充劑,平均粒徑0.5μm) ‧耦合劑(E) (E)-1:3-胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷(NUC公司製「A-1110」) •著色劑(I) (I)-1:黑色顏料(大日精化公司製)。>Materials for manufacturing protective film-forming composition> The raw materials used in the production of the composition for forming a protective film are shown below. ‧Polymer composition (A) (A)-1: Acrylic polymer obtained by copolymerizing methyl acrylate (85 parts by mass) and 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (15 parts by mass) (weight average molecular weight 370,000, glass transition temperature 6°C) ‧Thermosetting component (B1) (B1)-1: Bisphenol A type epoxy resin ("jER828" manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation, epoxy equivalent 184~194g/eq) (B1)-2: Bisphenol A epoxy resin ("jER1055" manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation, epoxy equivalent 800-900g/eq) (B1)-3: Dicyclopentadiene type epoxy resin ("EPICLON HP-7200HH" manufactured by DIG Corporation, epoxy equivalent 255~260g/eq) • Heat hardener (B2) (B2)-1: Dicyandiamide ("ADK HARDENER EH-3636AS" manufactured by ADEKA Corporation, thermally active latent epoxy resin hardener, active hydrogen content 21g/eq) ‧Hardening accelerator (C) (C)-1: 2-phenyl-4,5-dimethylolimidazole ("CUREZOL 2PHZ-PW" manufactured by Shikoku Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) • Filler (D) (D)-1: Silicon oxide filler ("SC2050MA" manufactured by ADMATECHS Co., Ltd., silica filler modified with epoxy-based compound surface, average particle size 0.5 μm) ‧Coupling agent (E) (E)-1: 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane ("A-1110" manufactured by NUC Corporation) •Colorant (I) (I)-1: Black pigment (manufactured by Dari Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.).

[實施例1] >支撐片的製造> (黏著劑組合物(I-4)的製造) 製造固形份濃度為30質量%的非能量線硬化性的黏著劑組合物(I-4),其含有丙烯酸系聚合物(100質量份,固形份)及3官能伸苯二甲基二異氰酸酯系交聯劑(三井武田CHEMICALS公司製「TAKENATE D110N」)(40質量份(固形份)),作為溶媒,還含有丁酮、甲苯及乙酸乙酯的混合溶媒。上述丙烯酸系聚合物,是由丙烯酸2-乙基己酯(2EHA)(80質量份)及丙烯酸2-羥乙酯(HEA)(20質量份)共聚合而成之重量平均分子量為800000的預共聚物。[Example 1] >Manufacture of support sheet> (Manufacture of adhesive composition (I-4)) Manufacturing a non-energy ray-curable adhesive composition (I-4) having a solid content concentration of 30% by mass, which contains an acrylic polymer (100 parts by mass, solid content) and a trifunctional xylylene diisocyanate system A cross-linking agent ("TAKENATE D110N" manufactured by Mitsui Takeda Chemicals Co., Ltd.) (40 parts by mass (solid content)) as a solvent also contains a mixed solvent of methyl ethyl ketone, toluene and ethyl acetate. The above acrylic polymer is a prepolymer obtained by copolymerizing 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA) (80 parts by mass) and 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA) (20 parts by mass) with a weight average molecular weight of 800,000 Copolymer.

(支撐片的製造) 使用聚對苯二甲酸乙二醇酯製膜的單面藉由矽酮處理而剝離處理後的剝離膜(LINTEC公司製「SP-PET381031」,厚度38μm),在其上述剝離處理面,塗佈上述所得的黏著劑組合物(I-4),藉由在120℃使其加熱乾燥2分鐘,形成非能量線硬化性的黏著劑層。此時,以黏著劑層的厚度成為4μm的方式設定條件,塗佈黏著劑組合物(I-4)。(Manufacture of support sheet) A peeling film (“SP-PET381031” manufactured by LINTEC Corporation, thickness 38 μm) was peeled off on one side of the film made of polyethylene terephthalate by silicone treatment, and coated on the above peeling treatment surface The adhesive composition (I-4) obtained above was heated and dried at 120° C. for 2 minutes to form a non-energy ray-curable adhesive layer. At this time, the conditions were set so that the thickness of the adhesive layer became 4 μm, and the adhesive composition (I-4) was applied.

藉由在聚丙烯製膜(三菱樹脂公司製,厚度80μm)一側的表面,使金屬輥的凹凸面一邊加熱一邊迴轉而加壓,製作一側的面為凹凸面,另一側的面為平滑面(光滑面)的基材。針對此基材的凹凸面,依據JIS B 0601:2013,測定最大高度粗糙度(Rz)時,為5μm。The surface of one side of the polypropylene film (made by Mitsubishi Resin Co., Ltd., thickness 80 μm) was made to rotate and pressurize the uneven surface of the metal roll while heating, and the surface on one side was made into an uneven surface, and the surface on the other side was Base material with smooth surface (smooth surface). The uneven surface of this substrate was 5 μm when the maximum height roughness (Rz) was measured according to JIS B 0601:2013.

接著,藉由在上述所得的黏著劑層的露出面,貼合上述基材的凹凸面,獲得將基材、黏著劑層及剝離膜依此順序,在其厚度方向積層而構成的支撐片。所得的支撐片的寬度(換言之,基材及黏著劑層的寬度)為400mm。藉由以上,獲得本發明的支撐片。Next, by bonding the uneven surface of the base material on the exposed surface of the adhesive layer obtained above, a support sheet formed by stacking the base material, the adhesive layer and the release film in this order in the thickness direction is obtained. The width of the obtained support sheet (in other words, the width of the base material and the adhesive layer) was 400 mm. With the above, the support sheet of the present invention is obtained.

接著,對於支撐片,立即進行下述關於基材與黏著劑層間的非貼合區域的評價。此外,將此支撐片以此狀態使用於下述保護膜形成用複合片的製造。Next, with respect to the support sheet, the following evaluation of the non-lamination area between the base material and the adhesive layer was immediately performed. In addition, this supporting sheet is used in the production of the composite sheet for forming a protective film described below.

>保護膜形成用複合片的製造> (保護膜形成用組合物(III-1)的製造) 藉由將聚合物成分(A)-1(150質量份)、熱硬化性成分(B1)-1(60質量份)、(B1)-2(10質量份)、(B1)-3(30質量份)、(B2)-1(2質量份)、硬化促進劑(C)-1(2質量份)、填充劑(D)-1(320質量份)、耦合劑(E)-1(2質量份)及著色劑(I)-1(18質量份)溶解或分散於丁酮、甲苯及乙酸乙酯的混合溶媒,在23℃攪拌,獲得固形份濃度為51質量%的熱硬化性的保護膜形成用組合物(III-1)。且,此處所示的調配量全部為固形份量。>Manufacture of composite sheet for forming protective film> (Manufacture of composition (III-1) for forming a protective film) By combining the polymer component (A)-1 (150 parts by mass), the thermosetting component (B1)-1 (60 parts by mass), (B1)-2 (10 parts by mass), (B1)-3(30 Parts by mass), (B2)-1 (2 parts by mass), hardening accelerator (C)-1 (2 parts by mass), filler (D)-1 (320 parts by mass), coupling agent (E)-1( 2 parts by mass) and coloring agent (I)-1 (18 parts by mass) dissolved or dispersed in a mixed solvent of methyl ethyl ketone, toluene and ethyl acetate, and stirred at 23°C to obtain a thermosetting property with a solid content concentration of 51% by mass The protective film forming composition (III-1). In addition, all the formulation amounts shown here are solid parts.

(保護膜形成用膜的製造) 使用在聚對苯二甲酸乙二醇酯製膜的單面藉由矽酮處理而剝離處理後的剝離膜(第2剝離膜,LINTEC公司製「SP-PET381031」,厚度38μm),在其上述剝離處理面,使用刀式塗佈機,塗佈上述所得的保護膜形成用組合物(III-1),在100℃使其乾燥2分鐘,藉此製造厚度25μm的熱硬化性的保護膜形成用膜。(Manufacture of protective film forming film) Use a peeling film (the second peeling film, "SP-PET381031" manufactured by LINTEC Co., Ltd., thickness 38 μm) on one side of the polyethylene terephthalate film that has been peeled off by silicone treatment on one side. The treated surface was peeled off, and the composition (III-1) for forming a protective film obtained above was applied using a knife coater and dried at 100° C. for 2 minutes to produce a thermosetting protective film with a thickness of 25 μm.用膜。 With membrane.

再者,藉由在所得的保護膜形成用膜的不具備第2剝離膜側的露出面,貼合剝離膜(第1剝離膜,LINTEC公司製「SP-PET381031」,厚度38μm)的剝離處理面,獲得在保護膜形成用膜一側的面包括第1剝離膜、在另一面包括第2剝離膜的積層膜。所得的積層膜的寬度(換言之,保護膜形成用膜、第1剝離膜及第2剝離膜的寬度)為400mm。Furthermore, by peeling off the exposed surface of the obtained film for protective film formation which does not have the 2nd peeling film side, the peeling film (1st peeling film, "SP-PET381031" by LINTEC Corporation, thickness 38 micrometers) was bonded. On the surface, a laminated film including the first release film on the side of the protective film forming film and the second release film on the other side is obtained. The width of the obtained laminated film (in other words, the width of the protective film forming film, the width of the first release film and the second release film) was 400 mm.

(保護膜形成用複合片的製造) 準備1組(2支)直徑為5cm、從其內表面起至3mm為止的深度的區域為由硬度50度的耐熱性矽酮橡膠所構成的輥。 從上述所得的支撐片的黏著劑層將剝離膜去除。此外,從上述所得的積層膜將第1剝離膜去除。 然後,將上述將剝離膜去除而產生的黏著劑層的露出面,與將上述第1剝離膜去除而產生的保護膜形成用膜的露出面對向貼合,將此等支撐片與保護膜形成用膜重疊而成為積層物的同時,藉由將此積層物,以0.3m/min的速度,通過溫度設定在60℃的此等輥間的間隙,以0.5MPa的壓力加熱加壓(加熱疊層)。藉此,製作將基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用膜及第2剝離膜依此順序,在其厚度方向積層而構成的與作為目標的保護膜形成用複合片具有相同積層構造的積層片(保存前的保護膜形成用複合片)。 在所得的上述積層片中,其寬度(換言之,支撐片的寬度)為400mm,保護膜形成用膜的外徑為330mm。(Manufacture of composite sheet for forming protective film) One set (two pieces) with a diameter of 5 cm and a depth from its inner surface to a depth of 3 mm was prepared as a roller made of heat-resistant silicone rubber with a hardness of 50 degrees. The release film is removed from the adhesive layer of the support sheet obtained above. In addition, the first release film is removed from the laminate film obtained above. Then, the exposed surface of the adhesive layer resulting from the removal of the peeling film is bonded to the exposed surface of the protective film forming film resulting from the removal of the first peeling film, and the support sheet and the protective film The film for forming is stacked to form a laminate, and by using this laminate at a speed of 0.3 m/min, through the gap between these rollers whose temperature is set at 60° C., it is heated and pressurized with a pressure of 0.5 MPa (heat Laminated). In this way, a laminate having the same layered structure as the target protective film-forming composite sheet formed by stacking the base material, the adhesive layer, the film for forming a protective film, and the second release film in this order is prepared. Sheet (composite sheet for forming a protective film before storage). In the obtained laminated sheet, the width (in other words, the width of the support sheet) was 400 mm, and the outer diameter of the protective film forming film was 330 mm.

接著,將上述所得的全體的大小為400mm × 50m的積層片,以其長邊方向作為捲取方向,在捲取張力160N/m、捲取速度50m/min、捲取張力的推拔比90%的條件下,捲附在ABS樹脂的核心,捲取成輥狀。此時,基材在輥的徑方向上,以朝向外側的方式(換言之,使第2剝離膜接觸核心),捲取積層片。 接著,將此輥狀的積層片,在大氣環境下、60℃的溫度條件下,靜置保存7日(168小時)。 藉此,獲得具有如圖2所示構造的本發明的保護膜形成用複合片。Next, using the overall obtained laminate having a size of 400 mm × 50 m, with the longitudinal direction as the winding direction, the winding tension was 160 N/m, the winding speed was 50 m/min, and the winding tension was 90. Under the condition of %, the roll is attached to the core of ABS resin and wound into a roll shape. At this time, the base material is wound outward in the radial direction of the roller (in other words, the second release film is brought into contact with the core), and the laminate sheet is wound. Next, this roll-shaped laminated sheet was stored in an air environment at a temperature of 60° C. for 7 days (168 hours). Thereby, the composite sheet for forming a protective film of the present invention having the structure shown in FIG. 2 is obtained.

接著,針對結束在此種加熱加壓條件下的保存後的本發明的保護膜形成用複合片,評價如以下所示的項目。Next, with respect to the composite sheet for forming a protective film of the present invention after completion of storage under such heat and pressure conditions, the following items were evaluated.

>支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的評價> (黏著劑層的厚度的測定) 從上述所得的保護膜形成用複合片的5處切出大小為3mm × 3mm的試片。此5處的切出位置,為在圓形的保護膜形成用膜當中,相當於中心部位的1處,在靠近邊緣部的部位且相當於相對於此中心部大致點對稱的位置的4處。在此等5處的切出位置當中,相當於中心部的1處,與其外的靠近邊緣部的部位的4處的中心間距離為100mm。>Evaluation of composite sheet for forming support sheet and protective film> (Measurement of the thickness of the adhesive layer) A test piece having a size of 3 mm × 3 mm was cut out from 5 places of the composite sheet for forming a protective film obtained above. The five cut-out positions are the one corresponding to the central part of the film for forming a round protective film, and the four parts corresponding to the positions that are substantially point-symmetrical with respect to the central part near the edge . Among these five cut-out positions, one corresponds to one center portion, and the center-to-center distance from the four outer portions near the edge portion is 100 mm.

使用剖面樣品製作裝置(JEOL公司製「cross section polisher SM-09010」),間歇快門的條件為「in」10秒、「out」5秒,離子來源的電壓為3kV,總拋光時間為24小時,從上述試片形成其剖面。新形成的剖面,在1片的試片僅形成1面。Using a cross-section sample making device ("cross section polisher SM-09010" manufactured by JEOL), the conditions of the intermittent shutter are "in" for 10 seconds and "out" for 5 seconds, the ion source voltage is 3kV, and the total polishing time is 24 hours. A cross section is formed from the above test piece. In the newly formed section, only one side is formed on one test piece.

使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察此5處的試片的新形成的剖面,對各試片一一求得黏著劑層的厚度的最小值及最大值。此時的試片的剖面的觀察區域,在上述剖面的寬度方向,成為1mm的區域。 然後,採用此等最小值的平均值作為黏著劑層的S值,採用此等最大值的平均值作為黏著劑層的L值。結果如表1所示。Using a scanning electron microscope (SEM), the newly formed cross-sections of the five test pieces were observed, and the minimum and maximum thickness of the adhesive layer was determined for each test piece. The observation area of the cross section of the test piece at this time becomes a 1 mm area in the width direction of the cross section. Then, the average value of these minimum values is used as the S value of the adhesive layer, and the average value of these maximum values is used as the L value of the adhesive layer. The results are shown in Table 1.

(黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜的積層性的評價) 對於上述所得的保護膜形成用複合片,由其基材側的外部照射光,在黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜之間有無非貼合區域,從基材側的外部隔著支撐片以目視確認。此時,目視確認是橫跨保護膜形成用複合片中的保護膜形成用膜的形成區域全區域而進行。 然後,根據下述基準,評價黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜間的積層性的程度。結果如表1所示。 A:完全無非貼合區域。 B:雖然有非貼合區域,但其數目為3處以下。 C:非貼合區域有4處以上。(Evaluation of the stackability of the adhesive layer and the protective film forming film) For the composite sheet for forming a protective film obtained above, light is irradiated from the outside of the base material side, is there a non-bonding area between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film, and the supporting sheet is interposed from the outside of the base material side Confirm visually. At this time, it was visually confirmed that it was carried out across the entire formation area of the protective film forming film in the protective film forming composite sheet. Then, the degree of lamination between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film was evaluated according to the following criteria. The results are shown in Table 1. A: There is no non-sticking area. B: Although there are non-laminated areas, the number is 3 or less. C: There are 4 or more non-laminated areas.

(保護膜的印字辨識性的評價) 從上述所得的保護膜形成用複合片,去除第2剝離膜,將藉此所產生的保護膜形成用膜的露出面(與黏著劑層側相反側的面)貼附在8英吋的半導體晶圓的背面。此時的貼附是使用膠帶貼片機(LINTEC公司製「RAD2700」)而進行。藉此,製作將基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用膜及半導體晶圓依此順序,在其厚度方向積層而構成的第一積層構造體。(Evaluation of the legibility of the protective film) From the obtained composite film for protective film formation, the second release film was removed, and the exposed surface (the surface opposite to the adhesive layer side) of the resulting protective film formation film was attached to an 8-inch semiconductor The back of the wafer. The attachment at this time was performed using a tape mounter ("RAD2700" manufactured by LINTEC Corporation). In this way, a first build-up structure in which the base material, the adhesive layer, the film for forming a protective film, and the semiconductor wafer are stacked in this order in the thickness direction is produced.

接著,使用雷射印字裝置(EO Technics公司製「CSM300M」),第一積層構造體中的保護膜形成用膜當中,在黏著劑層側的面(第二面),隔著支撐片藉由照射雷射光而進行印字。此時,印出0.3mm × 0.2mm的大小的文字。Next, using a laser printing device ("CSM300M" manufactured by EO Technics), the surface (second side) on the side of the adhesive layer of the protective film forming film in the first laminated structure was interposed by the support sheet Printing by irradiating laser light. At this time, characters with a size of 0.3 mm × 0.2 mm are printed.

接著,將此保護膜形成用膜的印字(雷射印字),隔著支撐片以目視觀察,根據下述基準,評價印字(文字)的辨識性。結果如表1所示。此處評價的保護膜形成用膜的印字辨識性,視為等同於保護膜的印字辨識性。 A:印字為鮮明的,可容易地辨識。 B:印字為些許模糊,無法容易地辨識。 C:印字為不鮮明,無法辨識。Next, the printing (laser printing) of this protective film forming film was visually observed through the support sheet, and the legibility of the printing (character) was evaluated according to the following criteria. The results are shown in Table 1. The printability of the protective film forming film evaluated here is regarded as equivalent to the printability of the protective film. A: The printing is clear and can be easily recognized. B: The printing is a little vague and cannot be easily recognized. C: The printing is not clear and cannot be recognized.

接著,由此保護膜形成用膜剝除支撐片(基材及黏著劑層)。然後,使用光學顯微鏡(KEYENCE公司製),測定形成在保護膜形成用膜的印字(文字)的線的粗細。其結果,線的粗細為40μm以上,鮮明地印字。Next, the supporting sheet (base material and adhesive layer) is peeled off from this protective film forming film. Then, using an optical microscope (manufactured by KEYENCE), the thickness of the line of the printing (letter) formed on the protective film forming film was measured. As a result, the thickness of the line is 40 μm or more, and the characters are clearly printed.

(評價基材與黏著劑層之間的非貼合區域的有無以及其層間距離) 使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM,KEYENCE公司製「VE-9700」),針對上述所得的保護膜形成用複合片,確認基材與黏著劑層間的非貼合區域的有無。然後,當有非貼合區域時,測定其層間距離。此時的確認及測定為橫跨基材與黏著劑層的全區域而進行。 另外,測定此層間距離時,藉由與上述試片的情況的相同方法,在保護膜形成用複合片形成剖面,在此剖面,定基材與黏著劑層之間的層間距離。 然後,根據下述基準,進行關於基材與黏著劑層之間的非貼合區域的評價。結果如表1所示。 A:完全無非貼合區域。 B:雖然有非貼合區域,但其層間距離為0.5μm以下。 C:有非貼合區域,其層間距離大於0.5μm。(Evaluate the presence or absence of non-bonding areas between the substrate and the adhesive layer and the distance between the layers) Using a scanning electron microscope (SEM, "VE-9700" manufactured by Keyence Corporation), the presence or absence of the non-lamination area between the base material and the adhesive layer was confirmed for the obtained protective film forming composite sheet. Then, when there is a non-laminated area, the distance between the layers is measured. The confirmation and measurement at this time are performed across the entire area of the base material and the adhesive layer. In addition, when measuring this interlayer distance, a cross-section is formed on the composite film for forming a protective film by the same method as in the case of the above-mentioned test piece, and on this cross-section, the interlayer distance between the base material and the adhesive layer is determined. Then, according to the following criteria, evaluation was performed on the non-laminated area between the base material and the adhesive layer. The results are shown in Table 1. A: There is no non-sticking area. B: Although there is a non-laminated area, the interlayer distance is 0.5 μm or less. C: There is a non-laminated area, and the interlayer distance is greater than 0.5 μm.

(評價黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜之間的非貼合區域的有無以及其層間距離) 關於在評價上述基材與黏著劑層之間的非貼合區域時,同時確認黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜之間的非貼合區域的有無。然後,當有非貼合區域時,測定其層間距離。此時的確認及測定為橫跨保護膜形成用複合片中的保護膜形成用膜的形成區域全區域而進行。 另外,測定此層間距離時,藉由與上述試片的情況的相同方法,在保護膜形成用複合片形成剖面,在此剖面,測定黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜之間的層間距離。 然後,根據下述基準,進行關於黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜之間的非貼合區域的評價。結果如表1所示。 A:完全無非貼合區域。 B:雖然有非貼合區域,但其層間距離為0.5μm以下。 C:有非貼合區域,其層間距離大於0.5μm。(Evaluate the presence or absence of non-bonding areas between the adhesive layer and the protective film forming film and the distance between the layers) When evaluating the non-bonding area between the base material and the adhesive layer, the presence or absence of the non-bonding area between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film was also confirmed. Then, when there is a non-laminated area, the distance between the layers is measured. The confirmation and the measurement at this time were performed across the entire formation area of the protective film forming film in the protective film forming composite sheet. In addition, when measuring this interlayer distance, a cross section is formed on the composite film for forming a protective film by the same method as in the case of the above-mentioned test piece, and on this cross section, the interlayer distance between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film is measured. Then, according to the following criteria, evaluation was performed on the non-laminated area between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film. The results are shown in Table 1. A: There is no non-sticking area. B: Although there is a non-laminated area, the interlayer distance is 0.5 μm or less. C: There is a non-laminated area, and the interlayer distance is greater than 0.5 μm.

(保護膜形成用膜的第二面的凹凸度的評價) 從上述所得的保護膜形成用複合片,將第2剝離膜去除,將藉此所產生的保護膜形成用膜的露出面(與黏著劑層側相反側的面、第一面)貼附在8英吋的半導體晶圓(厚度200μm)的背面。此時的貼附使用膠帶貼片機(LINTEC公司製「RAD2700」)進行。藉此,製作將基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用膜及半導體晶圓依此順序,在其厚度方向積層而構成的第一積層構造體。 接著,在對此半導體晶圓貼附後的保護膜形成用膜當中的黏著劑層側的面(第二面)的狀態,隔著支撐片藉由目視確認,根據下述基準進行評價。結果如表1所示。 此處所評價的在保護膜形成用膜的第二面上的凹凸度,視為等同於在保護膜的與半導體晶圓側相反側的面(第二面)上的凹凸度。 A:平滑或是凹凸度極小,無損保護膜形成用膜的外觀。 B:在一部有不平整,雖然不平滑但凹凸度極小,無損保護膜形成用膜的外觀。 C:凹凸度大,損害保護膜形成用膜的外觀。(Evaluation of the unevenness of the second surface of the protective film forming film) From the composite sheet for forming a protective film obtained above, the second release film is removed, and the exposed surface (the surface opposite to the adhesive layer side and the first surface) of the resulting film for forming a protective film is attached to The back surface of an 8-inch semiconductor wafer (200 μm thick). The attachment at this time was performed using a tape mounter ("RAD2700" manufactured by LINTEC Corporation). In this way, a first build-up structure in which the base material, the adhesive layer, the film for forming a protective film, and the semiconductor wafer are stacked in this order in the thickness direction is produced. Next, the state of the surface (second surface) on the adhesive layer side of the protective film forming film after the semiconductor wafer was attached was visually confirmed through the support sheet, and evaluated according to the following criteria. The results are shown in Table 1. The unevenness on the second surface of the protective film forming film evaluated here is regarded as equivalent to the unevenness on the surface (second surface) on the side opposite to the semiconductor wafer side of the protective film. A: The smoothness or the unevenness is extremely small, and the appearance of the protective film forming film is not impaired. B: There is unevenness in one part, and although the unevenness is extremely small, the unevenness is extremely small, and the appearance of the protective film forming film is not impaired. C: The unevenness is large, which impairs the appearance of the protective film forming film.

>支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的製造以及支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的評價> [實施例2] 除了黏著劑層的厚度不是4μm而是成為5μm的方式設定條件,塗佈黏著劑組合物(I-4)的差異點以外,其餘藉由與實施例1時相同方法,製造支撐片並進行評價。 然後,除了使用此種支撐片的差異點以外,其餘藉由與實施例1時相同方法,製造保護膜形成用複合片並進行評價。 結果如表1所示。>Manufacture of composite sheet for forming support sheet and protective film and evaluation of composite sheet for forming support sheet and protective film> [Example 2] The support sheet was produced and evaluated by the same method as in Example 1 except that the thickness of the adhesive layer was not 4 μm but 5 μm to set the conditions and the difference between the application of the adhesive composition (I-4). . Then, except for the difference in using such a support sheet, a composite sheet for forming a protective film was produced and evaluated by the same method as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 1.

[實施例3] 除了黏著劑層的厚度不是4μm而是成為6μm的方式設定條件,塗佈黏著劑組合物(I-4)的差異點以外,其餘藉由與實施例1時相同方法,製造支撐片並進行評價。 然後,除了使用此種支撐片的差異點以外,其餘藉由與實施例1時相同方法,製造保護膜形成用複合片並進行評價。 結果如表1所示。[Example 3] The support sheet was manufactured and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1, except that the thickness of the adhesive layer was not 4 μm but 6 μm to set the conditions and the difference between the application of the adhesive composition (I-4). . Then, except for the difference in using such a support sheet, a composite sheet for forming a protective film was produced and evaluated by the same method as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 1.

[比較例1] 除了黏著劑層的厚度不是4μm而是成為3μm的方式設定條件,塗佈黏著劑組合物(I-4)的差異點以外,其餘藉由與實施例1時相同方法,製造支撐片並進行評價。 然後,除了使用此種支撐片的差異點以外,其餘藉由與實施例1時相同方法,製造保護膜形成用複合片並進行評價。 結果如表1所示。[Comparative Example 1] The support sheet was produced and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1, except that the thickness of the adhesive layer was not 4 μm but 3 μm, the conditions were set, and the difference between applying the adhesive composition (I-4) was used. . Then, except for the difference in using such a support sheet, a composite sheet for forming a protective film was produced and evaluated by the same method as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 1.

[比較例2] 藉由在聚丙烯製膜(三菱樹脂公司製,厚度80μm)一側的表面,將金屬輥的凹凸面一邊加熱一邊使其迴轉而加壓,製作一側的面為凹凸面、另一側的面為平滑面(光滑面)的基材。此時使用的金屬輥的凹凸面,相較於實施例1使用的金屬輥的凹凸面,凹凸度更大。針對所得的基材的凹凸面,依據JIS B 0601:2013,測定最大高度粗糙度(Rz)時,為8μm。[Comparative Example 2] The surface of one side of the polypropylene film (made by Mitsubishi Resin Co., Ltd., thickness 80 μm) was heated and rotated with pressure while heating the uneven surface of the metal roll, making the surface on one side an uneven surface and the other side The surface is a substrate with a smooth surface (smooth surface). The unevenness of the metal roller used at this time is larger than the unevenness of the metal roller used in Example 1. The uneven surface of the obtained base material was 8 μm when the maximum height roughness (Rz) was measured according to JIS B 0601:2013.

除了使用上述所得的基材的差異點以及黏著劑層的厚度不是4μm而是成為7μm的方式設定條件而塗佈黏著劑組合物(I-4)的差異點以外,其餘藉由與實施例1時相同方法,製造支撐片並進行評價。 然後,除了使用此種支撐片的差異點以外,其餘藉由與實施例1時相同方法,製造保護膜形成用複合片並進行評價。 結果如表1所示。Except for the difference between using the substrate obtained above and the thickness of the adhesive layer not to be 4 μm but to 7 μm, the conditions were set and the difference between applying the adhesive composition (I-4) was applied. In the same way, the support sheet was manufactured and evaluated. Then, except for the difference in using such a support sheet, a composite sheet for forming a protective film was produced and evaluated by the same method as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 1.

[表1]

Figure 108109520-A0304-0001
[Table 1]
Figure 108109520-A0304-0001

從上述結果可清楚得知,在實施例1~3中,黏著劑層的S值為2μm以上(2~4μm),黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜的積層性特別佳。此外,在此等實施例中,黏著劑層的L值為8μm以下(6~8μm),保護膜(保護膜形成用膜)的印字辨識性特別佳。From the above results, it is clear that in Examples 1 to 3, the S value of the adhesive layer is 2 μm or more (2 to 4 μm), and the stackability of the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film is particularly good. In addition, in these embodiments, the L value of the adhesive layer is 8 μm or less (6 to 8 μm), and the printability of the protective film (film for forming a protective film) is particularly good.

相對於此,在比較例1中,黏著劑層的S值為1μm,由於在黏著劑層有極薄的區域。因此,在黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜之間,存在多個非貼合區域,黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜的積層性變得不佳。再者,由於如此存在非貼合區域,隔著支撐片的保護膜(保護膜形成用膜)的印字辨識性亦變差。On the other hand, in Comparative Example 1, the S value of the adhesive layer was 1 μm, because there was an extremely thin region in the adhesive layer. Therefore, there are a plurality of non-bonding regions between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film, and the lamination property of the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film becomes poor. In addition, since there is such a non-lamination area, the legibility of the protective film (film for forming a protective film) across the support sheet also deteriorates.

此外,在比較例2中,黏著劑層的L值為10μm,在黏著劑層有極厚的區域。因此,隔著支撐片的保護膜(保護膜形成用膜)的印字辨識性變差。Furthermore, in Comparative Example 2, the L value of the adhesive layer was 10 μm, and there was an extremely thick region in the adhesive layer. Therefore, the legibility of the protective film (the film for forming a protective film) across the support sheet deteriorates.

另外,在實施例1~3中,基材與黏著劑層之間、黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜之間的任一者,完全沒有非貼合區域,或是即使有,其層間距離很小,保護膜形成用複合片具有良好的特性。 此外,在實施例1~3中,在保護膜形成用膜的第二面上的凹凸度小,保護膜形成用膜為外觀優良,可形成設計性高的保護膜。 [產業可利用性]In addition, in Examples 1 to 3, there is no non-bonding area at all between the base material and the adhesive layer, or between the adhesive layer and the protective film forming film, or even if there is, the interlayer distance Very small, the composite sheet for forming a protective film has good characteristics. In addition, in Examples 1 to 3, the unevenness on the second surface of the protective film forming film is small, the protective film forming film has an excellent appearance, and a protective film with high design can be formed. [Industry availability]

本發明可利用於半導體裝置的製造。The present invention can be applied to the manufacture of semiconductor devices.

1A、1B、1C‧‧‧保護膜形成用複合片 10‧‧‧支撐片 10a‧‧‧支撐片的保護膜形成用膜側的面(第一面) 10b‧‧‧支撐片的面(第二面) 11‧‧‧基材 11a‧‧‧基材的黏著劑層側的面(第一面、凹凸面) 11b‧‧‧基材的與黏著劑層側相反的面(第二面) 12‧‧‧黏著劑層 12a‧‧‧黏著劑層的與基材側相反側的面(第一面) 12b‧‧‧黏著劑層的基材側的面(第二面) 13、23‧‧‧保護膜形成用膜 13a‧‧‧保護膜形成用膜的面(第一面) 13b‧‧‧保護膜形成用膜的黏著劑層側的面(第二面) 15‧‧‧剝離膜 16‧‧‧治具用接著劑層 16a‧‧‧(未接觸保護膜形成用膜的)面 23a‧‧‧(未接觸黏著劑層的)面 23b‧‧‧保護膜形成用膜的黏著劑層側的面(第二面) 91‧‧‧基材與黏著劑層未貼合的區域(非貼合區域) 92‧‧‧黏著劑層與保護膜形成用膜未貼合的區域(非貼合區域) Ta‧‧‧黏著劑層的厚度 Ta1‧‧‧黏著劑層的厚度的最小值 Ta2‧‧‧黏著劑層的厚度的最大值 Tp‧‧‧保護膜形成用膜的厚度1A, 1B, 1C‧‧‧‧Composite sheet for protective film formation 10‧‧‧Support sheet 10a‧‧‧Support film on the protective film formation membrane side surface (first surface) 10b‧‧‧Support sheet surface (first (Two sides) 11‧‧‧ base material 11a‧‧‧ base material adhesive layer side surface (first surface, uneven surface) 11b‧‧‧ base material opposite adhesive layer side surface (second surface) 12‧‧‧adhesive layer 12a‧‧‧adhesive layer surface opposite to the substrate side (first surface) 12b‧‧‧adhesive layer substrate side surface (second surface) 13,23‧ ‧‧Protective film forming film 13a‧‧‧Protective film forming film surface (first surface) 13b‧‧‧Protective film forming film adhesive layer side surface (second surface) 15‧‧‧Releasable film 16‧‧‧ Adhesive layer for jig 16a‧‧‧ (without contact with protective film forming film) surface 23a‧‧‧ (without contact with adhesive layer) surface 23b‧‧‧‧ Adhesive for protective film forming film Layer-side surface (second surface) 91 ‧‧‧ Unbonded area of the substrate and the adhesive layer (non-bonded area) 92 ‧‧‧ Unbonded area of the adhesive layer and protective film forming film (non-bonded Bonding area) Ta‧‧‧ Thickness of adhesive layer Ta1‧‧‧Minimum thickness of adhesive layer Ta2‧‧‧Maximum thickness of adhesive layer T p ‧‧‧Thickness of protective film forming film

[圖1]是示意性地顯示本發明一實施形態相關的支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的剖面圖。 [圖2]是示意性地顯示本發明一實施形態相關的保護膜形成用複合片連同支撐片的剖面圖。 [圖3]是示意性地顯示本發明一實施形態相關的保護膜形成用複合片連同支撐片的剖面圖。 [圖4]是圖1所示的支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的放大剖面圖。FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a support sheet and a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a support sheet according to an embodiment of the present invention. 3 is a cross-sectional view schematically showing a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a supporting sheet according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the composite sheet for forming the support sheet and the protective film shown in FIG. 1.

1A‧‧‧保護膜形成用複合片 1A‧‧‧Composite sheet for forming protective film

10‧‧‧支撐片 10‧‧‧support sheet

10a‧‧‧支撐片的保護膜形成用膜側的面(第一面) 10a‧‧‧The film side surface (first surface) for forming the protective film of the support sheet

10b‧‧‧支撐片的面(第二面) 10b‧‧‧The side of the support piece (second side)

11‧‧‧基材 11‧‧‧ Base material

11a‧‧‧基材的黏著劑層側的面(第一面、凹凸面) 11a‧‧‧The surface of the base material on the adhesive layer side (first surface, uneven surface)

11b‧‧‧基材的與黏著劑層側相反的面(第二面) 11b‧‧‧The surface of the substrate opposite to the adhesive layer side (second surface)

12‧‧‧黏著劑層 12‧‧‧Adhesive layer

12a‧‧‧黏著劑層的與基材側相反側的面(第一面) 12a‧‧‧The surface of the adhesive layer opposite to the substrate side (first surface)

12b‧‧‧黏著劑層的基材側的面(第二面) 12b‧‧‧The surface of the adhesive layer on the substrate side (second surface)

13‧‧‧保護膜形成用膜 13‧‧‧Protective film forming film

13a‧‧‧保護膜形成用膜的面(第一面) 13a‧‧‧Face of protective film (first side)

13b‧‧‧保護膜形成用膜的黏著劑層側的面(第二面) 13b‧‧‧The surface (second surface) on the adhesive layer side of the protective film forming film

15‧‧‧剝離膜 15‧‧‧ peeling film

16‧‧‧治具用接著劑層 16‧‧‧Adhesive layer for jigs

16a‧‧‧(未接觸保護膜形成用膜的)面 16a‧‧‧(without contact with the protective film forming film) surface

Claims (3)

一種支撐片,為包括基材、在上述基材上包括黏著劑層的支撐片, 上述基材的上述黏著劑層側的面為凹凸面, 從上述支撐片的5處切出試片,在該些5片的試片中, 求得各別黏著劑層的厚度的最小值及最大值時,上述最小值的平均值為1.5μm以上,上述最大值的平均值為9μm以下。A support sheet is a support sheet including a substrate and an adhesive layer on the substrate, The surface of the base material on the side of the adhesive layer is an uneven surface, Test pieces were cut out from the above five support pieces, and among these 5 test pieces, When the minimum value and the maximum value of the thickness of each adhesive layer are determined, the average value of the minimum value is 1.5 μm or more, and the average value of the maximum value is 9 μm or less. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之支撐片,其中,上述黏著劑層直接接觸上述基材的凹凸面。The support sheet according to item 1 of the patent application scope, wherein the adhesive layer directly contacts the uneven surface of the base material. 一種保護膜形成用複合片,在如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所述之支撐片的黏著劑層上,包括保護膜形成用膜。A composite film for forming a protective film includes a film for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer of the support sheet as described in item 1 or 2 of the patent application.
TW108109520A 2018-03-30 2019-03-20 Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film TWI801532B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2018/013636 WO2019187014A1 (en) 2018-03-30 2018-03-30 Support sheet and composite sheet for protective film formation
WOPCT/JP2018/013636 2018-03-30

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW202001985A true TW202001985A (en) 2020-01-01
TWI801532B TWI801532B (en) 2023-05-11

Family

ID=68058644

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW108109520A TWI801532B (en) 2018-03-30 2019-03-20 Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7190483B2 (en)
KR (1) KR102467148B1 (en)
CN (1) CN111587472B (en)
TW (1) TWI801532B (en)
WO (1) WO2019187014A1 (en)

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5432853B2 (en) 1971-10-11 1979-10-17
JP5432853B2 (en) * 2010-07-30 2014-03-05 日東電工株式会社 Dicing tape-integrated film for semiconductor back surface, manufacturing method thereof, and manufacturing method of semiconductor device
JP6557912B2 (en) * 2013-08-01 2019-08-14 リンテック株式会社 Composite sheet for protective film formation
MY186759A (en) * 2014-08-22 2021-08-18 Lintec Corp Protective coating-forming sheet and method for manufacturing semiconductor chip provided with protective coating
SG11201807645SA (en) * 2016-03-24 2018-10-30 Lintec Corp Supporting sheet and composite sheet for protective film formation
JP6298226B1 (en) * 2017-03-30 2018-03-20 リンテック株式会社 Composite sheet for protective film formation

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR102467148B1 (en) 2022-11-14
JP7190483B2 (en) 2022-12-15
CN111587472A (en) 2020-08-25
TWI801532B (en) 2023-05-11
JPWO2019187014A1 (en) 2021-03-18
WO2019187014A1 (en) 2019-10-03
KR20200138145A (en) 2020-12-09
CN111587472B (en) 2024-04-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI761335B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
TW201620963A (en) Film for forming protective film, composite film for forming protective film
TWI783131B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI731874B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI822742B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film and method for producing same
TWI788543B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI801532B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI812687B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI783920B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film
JP7119070B2 (en) Method for manufacturing composite sheet for forming protective film, method for manufacturing semiconductor chip with protective film, and method for manufacturing semiconductor device
CN111466014B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film and method for producing same
WO2020116288A1 (en) Composite sheet for protective film formation and method for producing semiconductor chip
TW202138513A (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film and manufacturing method of chip having protective film wherein the composite sheet includes a supporting sheet and a protective film forming film
TW202104485A (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film and method for manufacturing semiconductor chip having protective film including an antifouling sheet and a film for forming a protective film formed on one side of the antifouling sheet